You are on page 1of 207

Copyright © 2021 NR. All rights reserved.

NR, the NR logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of NR Electric Co., Ltd. No NR
trademarks may be used without written permission. NR products appearing in this document may
be covered by P.R. China and foreign patents. NR Electric Co., Ltd. reserves all rights and benefits
afforded under P.R. China and international copyright and patent laws in its products, including but
not limited to software, firmware and documentation. NR Engineering Co., Ltd. is licensed to use
this document as well as all intellectual property rights owned or held by NR Electric Co., Ltd,
including but not limited to copyright, rights in inventions, patents, know-how, trade secrets,
trademarks and trade names, service marks, design rights, database rights and rights in data, utility
models, domain names and all similar rights.

The information in this document is provided for informational use only and does not constitute a
legal contract between NR and any person or entity unless otherwise specified. Information in this
document is subject to change without prior notice.

To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable IEC and IEEE standards, but
no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.

Although every reasonable effort is made to present current and accurate information, this
document does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently
for your purposes, please do not hesitate to contact us.
Preface

Preface

About This Manual


This document describes the setting Setting Guidelines and method with examples for protection
settings and other settings of the PCS-978S Transformer Relay.

Instead of final commissioning or service settings, this guide aims to provide a reference of setting
principle and method.

Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal
safety, as well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows
according to the degree of danger:

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result

in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.

Indicates that property damage can result if the measures specified are

not taken.

Important information about the product, please pay attention to avoid


undesired result.

Instructions and Warnings


The following hazard statements apply to this device.

Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this manual can
impair operator safety safeguards provided by this equipment.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay I


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

Have ONLY qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are not
qualified to service this equipment, you can injure yourself or others, or
cause equipment damage.

This device is shipped with default passwords. Default passwords should


be changed to private passwords at installation. Failure to change each
default password to a private password may allow unauthorized access. NR
shall not be responsible for any damage resulting from unauthorized access.

DO NOT look into the fibre (laser) ports/connectors.

DO NOT look into the end of an optical cable connected to an optical output.

DO NOT perform any procedures or adjustments that this instruction


manual does not describe.

Equipment components are SENSITIVE to electrostatic discharge (ESD).


Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD
procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment
BEFORE removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not
equipped to work with these components, contact NR about returning this
device and related NR equipment for service.

Insufficiently rated insulation can deteriorate under abnormal operating


conditions and cause equipment damage. For external circuits, use wiring
of SUFFICIENTLY RATED insulation that will not break down under
abnormal operating conditions.

SEVERE power and ground problems can occur on the communications


ports of this equipment as a result of using non-standard cables. Please use

II PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

the wiring method recommended in the manual for communication terminals.

DO NOT connect power to the relay until you have completed these
procedures and receive instruction to apply power. Equipment damage can
result otherwise.

Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than


those specified herein, may RESULT IN hazardous radiation exposure.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify


existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is
compatible with the product in your hand.

Document Conventions
 The abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are explained in “Appendix A Glossary”. The
Glossary also contains definitions of important terms.

 Menu path is connected with the arrow "→" and bold.

For example: the access path of protection settings is: MainMenu→Settings→Protection


Settings.

 Settings not in t.he table should be placed in brackets.

For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]

 Cross-references are presented in italics.

For example: refer to Figure 1.1-1, refer to Table 1.1-1, reference to Section 1.1

 Binary input signals, binary output signals, analogs, LED lights, buttons, and other fixed
meanings, should be written in double quotes and bold.

For example: press the button "ENT".

Symbols
 AND Gate

& & &

PCS-978S Transformer Relay III


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

 OR Gate

>=1 >=1 >=1

 Comparator

 Binary signal Input

BI xxx

 Signal input

SIG xxx

 Setting input

SET xxx

 Enable input

EN xxx

 Timer

Optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic

Timer
t
t

 Timer

Fixed delay pickup (10ms), fixed delay dropout (2ms)

10ms 2ms

 Timer

Settable delay pickup, fixed delay dropout

[Tset1] 0ms

IV PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

 Timer

Fixed delay pickup, settable delay dropout

0ms [Tset2]

 Timer

Settable delay pickup, settable delay dropout

[Tset1] [Tset2]

 Generator

 Transformer

 Reactor

 Motor

 Capacitor

 Busbar

 Circuit breaker

PCS-978S Transformer Relay V


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

52

 Current transformer

3CT
*

 Voltage transformer

3VT

 Disconnector

 Earth

Three-phase Corresponding Relationship


Basic
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 R, Y, B
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N RN,YN, BN
ABC L123 RYB
U (voltage) V U

Example
Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN IR, IY, IB, IN
Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3 UR, UY, UB
Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31 URY, UYB, UBR
U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2 UN, U1, U2

Warranty
This product is covered by the standard NR 10-year warranty. For warranty details, please consult
the manufacturer or agent for warranty information.

Document Structure

VI PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

This document is a comprehensive work covering Setting Guidelines and method of all settings.
Read the sections that pertain to your application to gain valuable information about using the
device. To concentrate on the target sections of this manual as your job needs and responsibilities
dictate. An overview of each manual section and section topics follows.

1 Introduction
Overview the application and functions of PCS-978S transformer relay.

2 Global Settings

Description of global settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and setting

guidelines, etc.

3 Protection Settings

Description of protection settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and setting

guidelines, etc.

4 Control Settings

Description of control settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and setting

guidelines, etc.

5 Measurement Settings

Description of measurement settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and

setting guidelines, etc.

6 Supervision Settings

Description of supervision settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and

setting guidelines, etc.

7 Communication Settings

Description of communication settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and

setting guidelines, etc.

8 Logic Links

Description of logic link settings in terms of access path, range, unit, step, default value and setting

guidelines, etc.

Appendix A Glossary

PCS-978S Transformer Relay VII


Date: February 5, 2021
Preface

List of abbreviations adopted in this manual.

Document Revision History


PN: ZL_PCS-978S_X_Application Manual_EN_Overseas General_X

Current version: R1.00

Corresponding Version
Date Description of change
Document Software

R1.00 R1.34 2021-02-05 First release

VIII PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

1 Introduction
1
Table of Contents

1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-a


1.2 Protection Functions ....................................................................................... 1-b
1.3 Control Functions ............................................................................................ 1-e
1.4 Measurement and Metering Functions .......................................................... 1-e
1.5 Supervision Functions ..................................................................................... 1-f
1.6 Communication Functions .............................................................................. 1-f
1.7 User Interfaces .................................................................................................. 1-f
1.8 Additional Functions ....................................................................................... 1-g

List of Figures

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of an auto-transformer ..................................................... 1-a

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of a shunt reactor ............................................................. 1-b

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1-a


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

1-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

1.1 Application
PCS-978S transformer relay provides fast and selective protection, control and monitoring for two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, auto-transformers, as well as shunt reactors.
1
The full transformer protections are configurable by user. Ancillary functions of fault diagnostic,
disturbance records, event records and communication function are integrated in the device.

The PCS-978S is applicable not only to conventional substations, but also to digital substations. It
supports IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 and provides GOOSE and SV network interfaces with high
real-time performance. The process level network supports peer-to-peer (P2P) mode and
networking mode, including single network mode and dual network mode. The station level network
could also receive and send MMS messages (such as interlocking signals) or process level
GOOSE messages (such as trip signals).

The function diagrams for protecting an auto-transformer and a reactor are respectively shown
below.

HVS

52 3 VT

*
3 CT

64 50B
87T 49 87W 67G 67P 21T
REF F

MVS 50/
*
51P

1 CT
* *
52 50/
* 67Q
3 CT 51G
1 CT
1 CT
*
50/
MR
51Q
1 CT

3 VT

59P 59G 27P 24 81O 81U

3 CT
*

52
3 VT

LVS

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of an auto-transformer

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1-a


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

Bus1

1 52

Line

3VT

52 50/
21IT 49 87R
51P

*
3 CT

50/
Shunt reactor 51G

3 CT
52
*

Bus2

1 CT
*

Neutral earthing reactor

Figure 1.1-2 Typical application of a shunt reactor

1.2 Protection Functions


ANSI Protection Functions Remark
 Biased differential protection with three slopes.
 Biased DPFC differential protection.
 Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection.
 Optional inrush current distinguished principles:
harmonic criterion or waveform distortion.
 Optional harmonic blocking modes: self-adaptive
87T Transformer differential protection
1Pblk1P mode, 2PBlk3P mode, 1Pblk3P mode.
 Overexcitation detection: fifth harmonic or third
harmonic criterion.
 Optional transfer methods: △→Y or Y→△.
 Independent CT saturation criterion.
 Differential CT circuit failure supervision.
 Optional direction element.
 CT transient characteristic difference detection.
64REF Restricted earth-fault protection
 CT saturation detection based on 2nd and 3rd
harmonics.

1-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

ANSI Protection Functions Remark


 CT transient characteristic difference detection.

87W Winding differential protection CT saturation detection based on 2nd and 3rd
harmonics.
1
 Biased DPFC differential protection.
 Biased current differential protection.
 Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection.
87R Reactor differential protection
 Independent CT saturation criterion.
 Harmonic blocking criterion.
 Differential CT circuit failure supervision.
 Zero-sequence power directional element and zero-
21IT Inter-turn fault protection sequence impedance element.
 CT and VT circuit failure blocking.
 Two stages definite-time overexcitation protection.
 Stage 1 of definite-time overexcitation protection for trip
purpose.
24 Overexcitation protection  Stage 2 of definite-time overexcitation protection for
alarm purpose.
 One stage inverse-time overexcitation protection for
both alarm purpose and trip purpose.
 Up to 6 stages with independent logic for high-voltage
side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2 respectively, up to 3 stages with independent logic for
common winding side.
67P  Voltage control element for each stage.
Phase overcurrent protection
50/51P  Optional direction element for each stage.
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage.
 Trip purpose or alarm purpose for each stage.
 Harmonic control element for each stage.
 Up to 4 stages with independent logic for high-voltage
side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2, and common winding side respectively.
 Optional direction element for each stage.
 Optional measured zero-sequence current or
67G
Earth fault protection calculated zero-sequence current.
50/51G
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage.
 Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage.
 Harmonic control element for each stage.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1-c


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

ANSI Protection Functions Remark


 Up to 2 stages with independent logic for high-voltage

1 67Q Negative-sequence overcurrent


side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2 respectively.
50/51Q protection  Optional direction element for each stage.
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage.
 Two stages thermal overload protection, and one stage
49 Thermal overload protection
for alarm purpose and the other stage for trip purpose.
 Up to 6 circuit breakers are supported.
 Phase-segregated re-trip and three-phases re-trip.
 Optional current criterion (phase overcurrent element,
50BF Breaker failure protection zero-sequence overcurrent element, negative-
sequence overcurrent element).
 Optional circuit breaker position check.
 Two time delays.
 Up to 2 stages with independent logic for high-voltage
side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2 respectively.
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
59P Overvoltage protection characteristic for each stage.
 Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.
 Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic.
 Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage.
 Up to 2 stages with independent logic for high-voltage
side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2 respectively.
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage.
27P Undervoltage protection
 Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.
 Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic.
 Blocked by instantaneous VT circuit failure.
 Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage.
 Up to 2 stages with independent logic for high-voltage
side, middle-voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side
2 respectively.
 Optional measured zero-sequence voltage or
59G Residual overvoltage protection calculated zero-sequence voltage.
 Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage.
 Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage.

1-d PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

ANSI Protection Functions Remark


 Up to 2 stages with independent logic.
81O Overfrequency protection


Voltage control element.
Up to 4 stages with independent logic.
1
81U Underfrequency protection
 Voltage control element.
 Up to 4 zones for high- and middle-voltage side
respectively.
 3 independent phase-to-ground distance elements for
each zone
 3 independent phase-to-phase distance elements for
each zone
 Selectable quadrilateral characteristics or mho
characteristics
21T Distance protection  Independent impedance settings and time delays for
each zone
 Zero-sequence current compensation for phase-to-
ground distance element
 Selectable forward direction, reverse direction or non
direction
 Load encroachment for each zone
 Power swing blocking and releasing for each zone
 Faulty phase selection for each zone

1.3 Control Functions


 Switchgear control

 Double point status synthesis

 Remote/Local control mode switch

 Interlocking logic for control

 Direct control

 Closing synchronism check with voltage selection

 Switchgear trip counter

 Tap position indicator and control

 Automatic voltage regulation (90V)

 Parallel voltage regulation (PVR)

1.4 Measurement and Metering Functions


 U, I, P, Q, S, Cos, f

 Positive, negative and zero sequences

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1-e


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

 Max.15th harmonics

 Energy metering (active and reactive energies for import and export)
1  DC analog inputs (0~±20mA or 0~±10Vdc)

1.5 Supervision Functions


 CT circuit failure supervision (CTS)

 VT circuit failure supervision (VTS)

 Tripping circuit supervision (TCS)

 Self diagnostic

 Powerful faults recording (max. buffer for 10,000 sampled points at 4.8 or 9.6 kHz)

 Event Recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision
events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.

 Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

 Single line diagram representation in display

1.6 Communication Functions


 Support of various protocols

Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 Ed.1 & Ed.2, IEC 61850 MMS Server, IEC
61850-8-1 GOOSE, IEC 61850-9-2LE SV, IEC 62439 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP),
IEC 62439 High-availability Seamless Ring (HSR) Redundancy Protocol, IEEE 802.1w Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).

 Up to four 10Base-T/100Base-TX copper Ethernet ports

 Up to fourteen 100Base-FX optical Ethernet ports

 Up to four 1000Base-SX optical Ethernet ports

 Two RS-485 serial ports for communication, the second one can be used as a RS-232 port for
printer

 One RS-485/TTL serial port for clock synchronization

 One BNC port for clock synchronization

 One ST-connector for clock synchronization

 Two RJ45 debugging ports (front and rear)

1.7 User Interfaces


 Friendly HMI interface with LCD, easy-to-use keypad aids simple navigation and set-point

1-f PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
1 Introduction

adjustment

 Push buttons for open/close, switch for selection between local and remote control, and user's
login and logout authority management 1
 4 Programmable operator pushbuttons with user-configurable labels

 Up to 18 programmable target LEDs with user-configurable labels

 1 RS-232 or RS-485 rear ports for printer

 Language switchover—English+ selected language

 Configuration tool—PCS-Studio

1.8 Additional Functions


 User programmable logic

 Switching system phase sequences function (ABC or ACB)

 Clock synchronization

 IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level, TTL level, ST-connector or BNC port

 PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level, binary input, ST-connector or
BNC port

 PPM: Pulse per minute (PPM) via RS-485 differential level or binary input

 IEEE 1588: Clock message based on IEEE 1588 via Ethernet network

 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network

 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network

 Message (IEC103/Modbus/DNP3.0): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol, Modbus


protocol and DNP3.0 protocol

 Cyber security

 NERC CIP

 IEC 62351

 IEC 62443

 IEEE 1686

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1-g


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

2 Global Settings

Table of Contents

2.1 System Settings ............................................................................................... 2-1 2


2.1.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................2-1

2.1.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................2-2

2.2 Device Settings ................................................................................................ 2-7


2.2.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................2-7

2.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................2-7

2.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................2-7

2.3 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings......................................................... 2-11


2.3.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 2-11

2.3.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 2-11

2.3.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................ 2-11

2.4 Label Settings ................................................................................................ 2-12


2.4.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................2-12

2.4.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................2-12

2.4.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................2-12

2.5 Clock Synchronization Settings ................................................................... 2-13


2.5.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................2-13

2.5.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................2-13

2.5.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................2-15

2.6 OutMap Settings ............................................................................................ 2-18


2.6.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................2-18

2.6.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................2-18

2.6.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................2-18

List of Tables

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-a


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Table 2.1-1 Phase compensation matrix ............................................................................... 2-3

Table 2.3-1 Recommended setting value of [RecDur_PostFault] ..................................... 2-12

Table 2.5-1 Setting value options of [Opt_TimeSyn] ......................................................... 2-15

2-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear. 2
2.1 System Settings
2.1.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  System Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  System
Settings

2.1.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


1 Active_Grp 1~20 1 -
2 Opt_SysFreq 50.0, 60.0 - Hz
3 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters - -
4 Sn 0.100~5000.000 0.001 MVA
5 HVS.U1n_Plate 0.000~9999.000 0.001 kV
6 MVS.U1n_Plate 0.000~9999.000 0.001 kV
7 LVS.U1n_Plate 0.000~9999.000 0.001 kV
8 U1n 0.000~2000.000 0.001 kV
9 Zn_Reac_NP 0.000~10000.000 0.001 ohm
10 Clk_MVS_WRT_HVS 0~11 1 Clk
11 Clk_LVS_WRT_HVS 0~11 1 Clk
12 Clk_PhComp 0~11 1 Clk
13 HVS.En_I0Elim Enabled, Disabled - -
14 MVS.En_I0Elim Enabled, Disabled - -
15 LVS.En_I0Elim Enabled, Disabled - -
16 x.U1n 0.000~1100.000 0.001 kV
17 x.U2n 1.000~200.000 0.001 V
18 x.Neu.U1n 0.000~1100.000 0.001 kV
19 x.Neu.U2n 1.000~200.000 0.001 V
20 25.Ref.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
21 25.Ref.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
22 25.Syn.U1n 0.00~1100.00 0.01 kV
23 25.Syn.U2n 1.00~200.00 0.01 V
24 x.I1n 0~9999 1 A
25 x.I2n 1 or 5 - A

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-1


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


26 x.Neu.I1n 0~9999 1 A
27 x.Neu.I2n 1 or 5 - A
28 x.En_VT Enabled, Disabled - -
NoVolSel, DblBusOneCB, 3/2BusCB, -
29 x.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig -
3/2TieCB

2 30 x.En_RevCT Enabled, Disabled - -


31 x.Neu.En_RevCT Enabled, Disabled - -
32 Opt_PhSeq ABC, ACB - -

2.1.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [Active_Grp]

The current protection setting group number. Up to 20 group settings are provided in the device,
but only one is active at a time. The settings except protection settings and synchronism check,
are common for all protection groups.

2. [Opt_SysFreq]

It is option of system frequency, and can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz.

3. [PrimaryEquip_Name]

It is designed to configure the name of corresponding primary equipment (transformer, busbar,


line, capacitor, etc.), e.g.: “DodomaLine1”. It will be displayed in the printed result and the
DFR (Disturbance Fault Recording) file.

The maximum permissible length of this setting is 20 characters.

This setting is case sensitive.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”
|“m”|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“
Y”|“y”|“Z”|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9”

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. [Sn]

Transformer or reactor capacity.

5. [HVS.U1n_Plate], [MVS.U1n_Plate], [LVS.U1n_Plate], [U1]

They are the primary rated voltages at x side of transformer or reactor marked on the
nameplate.

The setting principle of rated phase-to-phase voltages of each side is to take the primary rated
voltage marked on the nameplate of transformer as the primary rated voltage of corresponding
side. For an on-load tap changing transformer, the voltage of transformer with tap in middle

2-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

position is taken as the value of this setting.

For example, if the voltage at 220kV side is 230kV for an on-load tap changing transformer
with tap in its middle position, and then the setting is set as 230kV.

For one side not used in the device, please set the primary rated voltage 2
value of the corresponding side as “0”.

6. [Clk_MVS_WRT_HVS], [Clk_LVS_WRT_HVS]

They are the wiring o′clock of MV/LV side with respect to HV side, is the parameter shown on
transformer nameplate with the range of 0~11, and need not further calculation.

7. [Clk_PhComp]

It is the target o′clock that each side current will be shift to for phase compensation.

For examples:

The vector group of a transformer is Y0/Δ11 and the target o′clock ([Clk_PhComp]) is set to
“11”. Therefore, the setting [Clk_LVS_WRT_HVS] should be set to “11”.

 For HV side, the clock of HV side with reference to target o′clock is 1 (i.e. wiring o′clock
12-target o′clock 11) clock, so the matrix of relative o′clock 1 is adopted to compensate
HV side current. Zero-sequence current elimination has no effect on phase compensation
in the condition.

 For LV side, the clock of LV side with reference to target o′clock is 0 (i.e. wiring o′clock 11-
target o′clock 11), so the matrix of relative o′clock 0 is adopted to compensate LV side
current. Then it is needed to decide whether zero-sequence current is eliminated and
select the corresponding matrix.

If an earthing transformer is connected at LV side out the protection zone of differential


protection, then matrix of relative o′clock 0 without zero-sequence current elimination can be
selected.

If an earthing transformer is connected at LV side in the protection zone of differential


protection, then zero-sequence current must be eliminated and otherwise differential
protection may operate unexpectedly during an external fault. Therefore the matrix of relative
o′clock 0 with zero-sequence current elimination should be selected.

Table 2.1-1 Phase compensation matrix

Matrix (without zero-sequence current Matrix (with zero-sequence current


Relative o'clock
elimination) elimination)

 1 0 0  2  1  1
0
0 1 0 1 
  1 2  1
  3
0 0 1  1  1 2

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-3


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Matrix (without zero-sequence current Matrix (with zero-sequence current


Relative o'clock
elimination) elimination)

 1  1 0
1 
1   0 1  1
3
 1 0 1

2  0  1 0  1  2 1
2
 0 0 1  1 
  1 1  2
  3
 1 0 0  2 1 1

 0  1 1
1 
3   1 0  1
3
 1 1 0

0 0 1   1  1 2
1 
4
 1 0 0
    2  1  1
3
0 1 0  1 2  1

 1 0 1
1 
5   1  1 0
3
 0 1  1

 1 0 0  2 1 1
6
 0  1 0 1 
  1  2 1
  3
 0 0  1  1 1  2

  1 1 0
1 
7   0  1 1
3
 1 0  1

 0 1 0  1 2  1 
8
0 0 1
1 
  1  1 2 
 3
 1 0 0  2  1  1

 0 1  1
1 
9   1 0 1
3
 1  1 0

 0 0  1  1 1  2
10
 1 0 0
1 
  2 1 1
 3
 0  1 0  1  2 1

2-4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Matrix (without zero-sequence current Matrix (with zero-sequence current


Relative o'clock
elimination) elimination)

 1 0  1
1 
11   1 1 0
3
 0  1 1

8. [HVS.En_I0Elim], [MVS.En_I0Elim], [LVS.En_I0Elim] 2


They are logic settings to enable or disable zero-sequence current elimination for phase
compensation of each side of transformer. The setting is recommended to be set to “Enabled”
in general, and only if one side of transformer, without eathing transformer being connected,
is no grounded, the setting of corresponding side is recommended to be set to “Disabled”.

9. [x.U1n], [x.U2n]

They are primary voltage and secondary voltages of the three-phase VT at each side of a
transformer respectively, which are phase-to-phase voltage values.

They should be set according to the actual primary value and secondary value of the
corresponding side VT. For example, if the voltage ratio is 220kV/100V at HV side of a
transformer, [HVS.U1n] shall be set as “220kV” and [HVS.U2n] should be set as “100V”.

10. [x.Neu.U1n], [x.Neu.U2n]

They are primary and secondary rated voltages of broken-delta VT at x side, which should be
set according to the actual primary value and secondary value of the corresponding side VT.

11. [25.Ref.U1n], [25.Ref.U2n]

They are primary and voltage values of VT of reference side of synchronism check.

12. [25.Syn.U1n], [25.Syn.U2n]

They are primary and voltage values of VT of synchronism side of synchronism check.

13. [x.I1n], [x.I2n]

They are primary and secondary rated currents of CT at x side, which should be set according
to the actual primary value and secondary value of the corresponding side CT.

14. [x.Neu.I1n], [x. Neu.I2n]

They are primary and secondary rated currents of neutral CT at x side, which should be set
according to the actual primary value and secondary value of the corresponding side CT.

15. [x.En_VT]

The setting is used to enable or disable putting the x-side VT in service. For the side configured
with actual VT, the setting corresponding to this side should be set as “Enabled”. If the
configuration is based on a long-term or maximum wiring plan, and there is no VT at the current
site, this setting should be set as “Disabled”. If the setting is set as “Disabled”, it will affect the
related voltage protection functions, such as 59P, 59G and 27P, for the detailed information,

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-5


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

please refer to the technical manual.

16. [x.VolSel.Opt_CBConfig]

This setting is used to select the circuit breaker arrangement for voltage selection. The voltage
selection function can be used to switch the reference and synchronization voltages for the
synchronism check function in double busbars and one-and-half circuit breakers scenarios, or

2 to switch three-phase voltages among double busbars used by protection calculations or


measurements.

NoVolset: no voltage selection

DblBusOneCB: double busbar with a single breaker

3/2BusCB: bus-side circuit breaker of one and a half breaker

3/2TieCB: line-side circuit breaker of one and a half breakers

17. [x.En_RevCT]

It is used to adjust the current polarity of CT at x side of transformer, and the default value is
“Disabled”.

Disabled: keep the connected current polarity unchanged

Enabled: make the connected current polarity reversed

When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction by PCS-
978S, the setting should be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change external
wiring of primary CT.

18. [x.Neu.En_RevCT]

It is used to adjust the current polarity of zero-sequence CT at x side of transformer, and the
default value is “Disabled”.

Disabled: keep connected current polarity unchanged

Enabled: make connected current polarity reversed

When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction by PCS-
978S, the setting should be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change external
wiring of primary CT.

19. [Opt_PhSeq]

The setting is used to select the phase sequence, ABC or ACB, set according to the actual
system phase sequence.

This setting informs the device of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT
and VT inputs on the device, labelled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B
and C for correct operation. This will affect the positive and negative sequence quantities
calculated by the device and will also affect functions that are dependent on phase quantities.

2-6 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

2.2 Device Settings


2.2.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Device Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  Device
Settings
2
2.2.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Disabled
1 En_DebugPort - -
Enabled
Disabled
2 En_TelnetPort - -
Enabled
Disabled
3 En_VirtualLCDPort - -
Enabled
4 Ctrl_Password 000~999 - -
Disabled
5 En_NoCtrlPwd - -
Enabled
Disabled
6 En_PopupRecord_Blkd - -
Enabled
DC
7 Opt_Pwr_BI AC50Hz - -
AC60Hz
8 B**.Un_BinaryInput 24~250 1 V
9 P1.Un_BinaryInput 24~250 1 V
10 U_Pickup_BI 50.0~80.0 0.1 %
11 U_Dropoff_BI 50.0~80.0 0.1 %
Disabled
12 En_Jitter_Blk - -
Enabled
13 Mon_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
14 Num_Blk_Jitter 2~500000 1 -
15 Blk_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
16 Num_Reblk_Jitter 1~500000 1 -
Disabled
17 B**.En_BICheckInstP - -
Enabled

2.2.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [En_DebugPort]

It is designed to enable/disable the debugging port of this device.

The debugging port is used for debugging tool connection, program download, variable
debugging, etc via PCS-Studio configuration tool.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-7


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

If the debugging port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If all the unnecessary ports (including the debugging port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

2. [En_TelnetPort]

It is designed to enable/disable the Telnet port of this device.


2 If the Telnet port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If all the unnecessary ports (including the Telnet port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

3. [En_VirtualLCDPort]

It is designed to enable/disable the virtual LCD port of this device.

The virtual LCD port is used to simulate a virtual HMI to acquire device information via PCS-
Studio configuration tool.

If the virtual LCD port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If all the unnecessary ports (including the virtual LCD port) are required to be disabled to
ensure cyber security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

4. [Ctrl_Password]

It is designed to configure the control operation password via LCD of this device.

Only digits from “000” to “999” can be accepted.

If the setting [En_NoCtrlPwd] is configured as “Enabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

5. [En_NoCtrlPwd]

It is designed to disable/enable the control operation password via LCD of this device.

For control operation via LCD of this device, if password is NOT required, please configure
this setting as “Enabled”. If password is required, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

6. [En_PopupRecord_Blkd]

It is designed to enable/disable the event records automatic pop up blocking function.

If all the event records (including disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, control
events, etc.) are forbidden to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically, i.e.: they
can only be viewed by entering corresponding menus, please configure this setting as
“Enabled”.

If all these event records are required to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically,
please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

7. [Opt_Pwr_BI]

2-8 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

It is designed to configure the power supply mode of binary input module of this device.

3 setting value options are available: DC, AC50Hz and AC60Hz.

Value of this setting must be the same as the power supply mode of the binary inputs which
are connected to this device.

8. [B**.Un_BinaryInput], [P1.Un_BinaryInput],

It is designed to configure the voltage level of the binary input module (Slot B**) and the PWR
2
module (Slot P1).

Value of this setting must be the same as the voltage level of the binary inputs which are
connected to this device.

9. [U_Pickup_BI]

It is designed to configure the pickup voltage of binary input module of this device.

This setting is expressed as a percentage value.

Value of this setting must be smaller than the minimum normal binary input voltage of the
binary inputs connected to this device.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “63.0%”.

10. [U_Dropoff_BI]

It is designed to configure the drop-off voltage of binary input module of this device.

This setting is expressed as a percentage value.

Value of the setting [U_Dropoff_BI] must be smaller than value of the setting [U_Pickup_BI] in
this device.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “55.0%”.

11. [En_Jitter_Blk]

It is designed to enable/disable the jitter processing function in case of binary input voltage
variation.

If binary input jitter processing is required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

12. [Mon_Window_Jitter]

It is designed to configure the monitoring window of binary input jitter processing. In the time
span defined by this setting, the binary input state changes will be recorded.

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.

If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-9


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

13. [Num_Blk_Jitter]

It is designed to configure the times threshold to block binary input status change due to jitter

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.

If the setting [Blk_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting [Num_Reblk_Jitter]


2 is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too.

If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

14. [Blk_Window_Jitter]

It is designed to configure the blocking window of binary input status change due to jitter. In
the time span defined by this setting, the binary input state changes will be recorded.

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.

If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

15. [Num_Reblk_Jitter]

It is designed to configure the times threshold to initiate immediately another blocking window
of binary input status change due to continuous jitter.

If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.

If the setting [Mon_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting [Num_Blk_Jitter]


is recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too.

If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

16. [B**.En_BICheckInstP]

It is designed to enable/disable the high-power conducting mode of binary inputs

If the binary input is required to be considered as being energized only when the instantaneous
active power rises to a certain value together during this mode, so as to avoid mistaken signal
and improve the anti-interference ability, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”. Now the binary input will be considered
to be energized without checking the instantaneous active power.

This conducting mode is only available in the device equipped with some certain modules (e.g.:
NR6604A, NR6611A). If these modules are not equipped, this conducting mode will be
unavailable, so this setting will be hidden.

If this setting is configured as “Enabled”, the debouncing time of corresponding binary inputs

2-10 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

must be greater than 20ms.

2.3 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings


2.3.1 Access Path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  DFR Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  DFR Settings 2
2.3.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


1 RecDur_PreTrigDFR 0.000~1.000 0.001 s
2 RecDur_PostFault 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
3 MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

2.3.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [RecDur_PreTrigDFR]

It is designed to configure the waveform recorded duration before the trigger element operates.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “0.100s”.

2. [RecDur_PostFault]

It is designed to configure the waveform recorded duration after the DFR trigger element drops
off.

If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the waveform recorded
duration after the last trigger element drops off.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured according to


the DFR trigger mode as shown in the following table.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-11


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Table 2.3-1 Recommended setting value of [RecDur_PostFault]

No. DFR trigger mode Recommended setting value

1 “Level trigger” (Including high-level trigger, low-level trigger) 0.100s

“Edge trigger” (Including falling-edge trigger, rising-edge trigger,


2 1.000s
bilateral-edge trigger)

2 3 Combination of “Level trigger” and “Edge trigger” 1.000s

3. [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR]

It is designed to configure the maximum waveform recorded duration after the trigger element
operates.

If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the maximum waveform
recorded duration after the 1st trigger element operates.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:

If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.

If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.

Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “1.000s”.

2.4 Label Settings


2.4.1 Access Path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  Label Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  Label
Settings

2.4.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Step Unit


-
1 Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink Max. 30 characters -

-
2 Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink Max. 30 characters -

2.4.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [Bxx.Name_**_GCommLink] (**=00, 01, 02...)

It is designed to configure the user-defined part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic
data, etc. for No.** GOOSE communication link of the module located in No.xx slot. This user-
defined part is designed to customize the GOOSE communication link name.

2-12 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

The maximum permissible length of this setting is 30 characters.

This setting is case sensitive.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”
|“m”|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“
Y”|“y”|“Z”|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9” 2
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink] (**=00, 01, 02...)

It is designed to configure the user-defined part of the alarm signals, logic link settings, statistic
data, etc. for No.** SV communication link of the module located in No.xx slot. This user-
defined part is designed to customize the SV communication link name.

The maximum permissible length of this setting is 30 characters.

This setting is case sensitive.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”
|“m”|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“
Y”|“y”|“Z”|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9”

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.5 Clock Synchronization Settings


2.5.1 Access Path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  ClockSyn Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  ClockSyn
Settings

2.5.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Conventional
1 Opt_TimeSyn SAS - -
NoTimeSyn
2 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12 1 -
3 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 1 -
0.0.0.0~
4 IP_Server_SNTP - -
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~
5 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP - -
255.255.255.255

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-13


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Enabled
6 DST.En - -
Disabled
7 DST.OffsetMinute 0~255 1 -
Jan
Feb

2 Mar
Apr
May
Jun
8 DST.MonthInYear_Start - -
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
1st
2nd
9 DST.WeekInMonth_Start 3nd - -
4th
Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday, Wednesday
10 DST.DayInWeek_Start - -
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
11 DST.HourInDay_Start 0~23 1 -
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
12 DST.MonthInYear_End - -
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
1st
2nd
13 DST.WeekInMonth_End - -
3nd
4th

2-14 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
14 DST.DayInWeek_End Wednesday - -
Thursday 2
Friday
Saturday
15 DST.HourInDay_End 0~23 1 -

2.5.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [Opt_TimeSyn]

It is designed to select the clock synchronization mode of the device.

3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 2.5-1 Setting value options of [Opt_TimeSyn]

No. Setting value option Description


If this option is selected, the “Conventional” clock synchronization mode will be
enabled. Now the following clock synchronization signals can be accepted by this
device. If none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal named
“Alm_TimeSyn” will be issued, and the clock synchronization mode will change to
the “SAS” mode automatically.
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
1 Conventional
PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B (Fibre): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS (Fibre): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
IEEE 1588 (Copper or Fibre): Clock message via IEEE 1588.
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
If this option is selected, the “SAS” clock synchronization mode will be enabled.
Now the following clock synchronization signals can be accepted by this device. If
none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal named “Alm_TimeSyn”
will be issued.
2 SAS
SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
IEC103: Clock messages through IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Modbus: Clock messages through Modbus protocol.
If the time synchronization function is not required, please select “NoTimeSyn”.
3 NoTimeSyn
No clock synchronization alarm will be issued in this mode.

2. [OffsetHour_UTC]

The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-15


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

zone of this device.

The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is designed to configure the offset hour of local time from UTC.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. [OffsetMinute_UTC]

2 The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time
zone of this device.

The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is designed to configure the offset minute of local time from
UTC.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. [IP_Server_SNTP]

It is designed to configure the IP address of the server when SNTP time synchronization mode
is selected.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the SNTP server.

If there is no SNTP server, please configure this setting as “0.0.0.0”.

5. [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]

It is designed to configure the IP address of the standby server when SNTP time
synchronization mode is selected.

If this device failed to connect the SNTP server, it will try to connect the standby SNTP server.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the standby SNTP
server.

If there is no standby SNTP server, please configure this setting as “0.0.0.0”.

6. [DST.En]

It is designed to enable/disable the Daylight Saving Time (DST).

If DST is required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”. Otherwise, please configure this
setting as “Disabled”.

7. [DST.OffsetMinute]

It is designed to configure the minute offset of DST, i.e. the difference between DST time and
local time.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

2-16 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

8. [DST.MonthInYear_Start]

It is designed to configure the month in year when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.


2
9. [DST.WeekInMonth_Start]

It is designed to configure the week in month when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

10. [DST.DayInWeek_Start]

It is designed to configure the day in week when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

11. [DST.HourInDay_Start]

It is designed to configure the hour in day when daylight time starts.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

12. [DST.MonthInYear_End]

It is designed to configure the month in year when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

13. [DST.WeekInMonth_End]

It is designed to configure the week in month when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

14. [DST.DayInWeek_End]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-17


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

It is designed to configure the day in week in when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

15. [DST.HourInDay_End]
2 It is designed to configure the hour in day when daylight time ends.

If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.6 OutMap Settings


The output map is used to route trip signals of protection elements and other logical output signals
to different output contacts on the device. Each protection element has its corresponding tripping
logic setting used to configure tripping output contacts, and up to 120 tripping logic setting are
supported.

The output map logic function provides 32 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
the physical tripping outputs, all tripping output contacts are with a settable dwell time to ensure
sufficient time of tripping command to open the circuit breaker.

2.6.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  OutMap Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  OutMap
Settings

2.6.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


OutMapxxx
1 00000000~ FFFFFFFF 1 -
(xxx=001, 002…120)
t_Dwell_xxx_OutMap
2 0.000~0.500 0.001 s
(xxx=001, 002…032)

2.6.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [OutMapxxx]

It is the tripping logic setting of programmable trip output map.

This setting is used to specify which breakers will be tripped when some protection element
operates. The setting comprises 32 binary bits as follows and is expressed by a hexadecimal
number of 8 digits from 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH.

2-18 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
2 Global Settings

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Output016_OutMap

Output015_OutMap

Output014_OutMap

Output013_OutMap

Output012_OutMap

Output010_OutMap

Output009_OutMap

Output008_OutMap

Output007_OutMap

Output006_OutMap

Output005_OutMap

Output004_OutMap

Output003_OutMap

Output002_OutMap

Output001_OutMap
Output011_OutMap
Function

2
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Output032_OutMap

Output031_OutMap

Output030_OutMap

Output029_OutMap

Output028_OutMap

Output027_OutMap

Output026_OutMap

Output025_OutMap

Output024_OutMap

Output023_OutMap

Output022_OutMap

Output021_OutMap

Output020_OutMap

Output019_OutMap

Output018_OutMap

Output017_OutMap
Function

Where, “Output001_OutMap” ~ “Output032_OutMap” can be considered as the mapping of


physical tripping outputs, one bit corresponds to one output contact.

This setting should be set on basis of application-specific drawings.

Taking the output map of transformer differential protection 87T for example, if 87T operates
to make “Output001_OutMap”, “Output002_OutMap”, “Output003_OutMap” contacts
pickup, bit “0”, bit “1” and bit “2” shall be filled with “1” and other bits shall be filled with “0”,
then the output map of 87T shall be set as “00000007H”.

For the detailed usage information of output map, please refer to the application manual of
PCS-978S transformer relay.

2. [t_Dwell_xxx_OutMap]

It is the pulse width setting of programmable trip output map.

The setting value should be long enough to ensure sufficient time of tripping command to open
the circuit breakers.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 2-19


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3 Protection Settings

Table of Contents

3.1 Basic Parameters Calculation ........................................................................ 3-1


3.1.1 For Transformer ..................................................................................................................3-1

3.1.2 For Reactor.........................................................................................................................3-2

3.2 Transformer Current Differential Protection (87T) ........................................ 3-3 3


3.2.1 Access Path ........................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................3-4

3.2.4 Setting Example .................................................................................................................3-9

3.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF) .................................................. 3-11


3.3.1 Access Path ...................................................................................................................... 3-11

3.3.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 3-11

3.3.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................ 3-11

3.3.4 Setting Example ...............................................................................................................3-14

3.4 Winding Differential Protection (87W) ......................................................... 3-15


3.4.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-15

3.4.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-15

3.4.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-15

3.4.4 Setting Example ...............................................................................................................3-18

3.5 Reactor Current Differential Protection (87R) ............................................. 3-19


3.5.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-19

3.5.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-19

3.5.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-19

3.5.4 Setting Example ...............................................................................................................3-21

3.6 Inter-turn Fault Protection (21IT) .................................................................. 3-22


3.6.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-22

3.6.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-22

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-a


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.6.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-22

3.7 Overexcitation Protection (24) ...................................................................... 3-23


3.7.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-23

3.7.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-23

3.7.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-24

3.8 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P) ....................................................... 3-26


3.8.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-26

3 3.8.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-26

3.8.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-28

3.9 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51G) ............................................... 3-38


3.9.1 Access Path ......................................................................................................................3-38

3.9.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................3-38

3.9.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................3-39

3.10 Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q) .............................. 3-49


3.10.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-49

3.10.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-49

3.10.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-50

3.11 Thermal Overload Protection (49) .............................................................. 3-58


3.11.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-58

3.11.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-58

3.11.3 Setting Guidelines ...........................................................................................................3-58

3.12 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) .............................................................. 3-60


3.12.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-60

3.12.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-60

3.12.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-61

3.13 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P) .......................................................... 3-64


3.13.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-64

3.13.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-64

3.13.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-65

3.14 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G) ..................................................... 3-70

3-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.14.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-70

3.14.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-70

3.14.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-70

3.15 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P) ........................................................ 3-73


3.15.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-73

3.15.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-73

3.15.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-74

3.16 Overfrequency Protection (81O) ................................................................ 3-79 3


3.16.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-79

3.16.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-79

3.16.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-79

3.17 Underfrequency Protection (81U) .............................................................. 3-80


3.17.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-80

3.17.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-80

3.17.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-80

3.18 Distance Protection (21T) ........................................................................... 3-81


3.18.1 Access Path ....................................................................................................................3-81

3.18.2 Setting List ......................................................................................................................3-81

3.18.3 Setting Guidelines ..........................................................................................................3-82

List of Figures

Figure 3.8-1 The direction element operation characteristics when phase A voltage is
polarized ................................................................................................................................ 3-29

Figure 3.8-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection ...... 3-33

Figure 3.8-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection ...... 3-35

Figure 3.8-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection 3-


36

Figure 3.8-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection ...... 3-37

Figure 3.9-1 The direction element operation characteristics when zero-sequence voltage is
polarized ................................................................................................................................ 3-40

Figure 3.9-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection 3-44

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-c


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Figure 3.9-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection 3-46

Figure 3.9-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection
............................................................................................................................................... 3-47

Figure 3.9-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection 3-48

Figure 3.10-1 The direction element operation characteristics of negative-sequence


overcurrent protection ......................................................................................................... 3-51

Figure 3.10-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection .............................................................................................................................. 3-53
3 Figure 3.10-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection .............................................................................................................................. 3-55

Figure 3.10-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection .............................................................................................................................. 3-56

Figure 3.10-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection .............................................................................................................................. 3-57

Figure 3.13-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection .... 3-67

Figure 3.13-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection .... 3-69

Figure 3.14-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of residual overvoltage protection 3-72

Figure 3.15-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of undervoltage protection ............. 3-76

Figure 3.15-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of undervoltage protection ............. 3-78

3-d PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear.

For the setting calculation in relation to power system operating conditions, it shall base on the
usual operating conditions as its calculation reference. Usual operating conditions usually refer to
normal operating conditions or the maintenance case that adjacent line or a component protected
is out of service. For the system whose operating mode changes greatly, the operating conditions
3
which setting calculation refers to should be confirmed by dispatching department according to
specific cases.

For all the calculation equations listed in this instruction manual, the results including current,
voltage and impedance are all expressed in the form of secondary actual value, unless it is
specifically mentioned.

3.1 Basic Parameters Calculation

3.1.1 For Transformer


During the normal operation, the magnitudes of secondary current of each side of transformer are
different due to the mismatch between the CT ratios and the power transformer ratio. The current
value difference between each side shall be eliminated before calculation for current differential
protection by amplitude compensation.

 Calculate the rated primary current at each side

𝑆𝑛
𝐼1𝑏𝐵𝑟𝑚 = ⁄ Equation 3.1-1
√3𝑈1𝑛𝐵𝑟𝑚

Where:

𝐼1𝑏𝐵𝑟𝑚 is the rated primary current of side m.

𝑆𝑛 is the maximum rated capacity (i.e., the setting [Sn]).

𝑈1𝑛𝐵𝑟𝑚 is rated primary voltage of side m (i.e., the settings [HVS.U1n_Plate], [MVS.U1n_Plate]
or [LVS.U1n_Plate]).

 Calculate the rated secondary current at each side

𝐼1𝑏𝐵𝑟𝑚
𝐼2𝑏𝐵𝑟𝑚 = ⁄𝐶𝑇 Equation 3.1-2
𝐵𝑟𝑚

Where:

𝐼2𝑏𝐵𝑟𝑚 is the rated secondary current of side m.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-1


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

𝐶𝑇𝐵𝑟𝑚 is the CT ratio of side m.

 Limitation of secondary current

For all differential protections, the secondary currents of each side must follow below criterion.

I 2bBr1 I 2bBr2 I
Max( , ,..., 2bBrm )
I 2nBr1 I 2nBr2 I 2nBrm
 128 Equation 3.1-3
I 2bBr1 I 2bBr2 I 2bBrm
Min( , ,..., )
I 2nBr1 I 2nBr2 I 2nBrm

3
When selecting CT, the ratio between maximum value and minimum value
should be considered. It is recommended that the ratio is smaller than 16.
Theoretically, the ratio is preferred to be as small as it can be.

For DPFC biased differential element, the secondary currents of each side must follow
Equation 3.1-4 in addition to Equation 3.1-3. Otherwise, alarm signals [ProtBrd.Fail_Settings]
and [FDBrd.Fail_Settings] are issued and the device will be blocked at the same time unless
DPFC biased differential element is disabled.

I 2bBr1 I 2bBr2 I
Max( , ,..., 2bBrm )  0.4
I 2nBr1 I 2nBr2 I 2nBrm
Equation 3.1-4
I I I
Min( 2bBr1 , 2bBr2 ,..., 2bBrm )  0.1
I 2nBr1 I 2nBr2 I 2nBrm

Where:

I2bBr1, I2bBr2… I2bBrm are rated secondary current of branch 1, 2 … m of transformer.

I2nBr1, I2nBr2…I2nBrm are CT rated secondary current of branch 1, 2 … m of transformer.

When viewing settings and values of conventional current differential


protection in the device, p.u. (per unit value) is provided. The current in
differential protection calculation is not actual secondary value but per unit
value which is got by actual secondary value of each branch of transformer
divided by transformer secondary rated current of each side (i.e., I2bBrm).

3.1.2 For Reactor

In the section, the suffix ”#” (# =1, 2, 3) in some measurements and


calculated quantities refers to the side (& branch) of the reactor, the suffix
“1” means the branch 1 of high-voltage side (head-end) of reactor, “2” means
the low-voltage side (tail-end) of reactor, “3” means the branch 2 of high-

3-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

voltage side (head-end) of reactor.

Under normal condition, the magnitudes of secondary current of both ends of reactor are different
due to the mismatch between CT ratios. The current value difference shall be eliminated before
calculation for current differential protection by amplitude compensation.

 Calculate the reference primary current

𝑆𝑛
𝐼1𝑏 = ⁄ Equation 3.1-5
√3𝑈𝑛

Where:

𝑆𝑛 is the rated capacity of reactor (i.e., the setting [Sn] in “System Settings” menu). 3
𝑈𝑛 is rated voltage of reactor. (i.e., the setting [U1n] in “System Settings” menu).

𝐼1𝑏 is the reference primary current of reactor.

 Calculate the rated secondary current at each side

𝐼2𝑏# = 𝐼1𝑏 ⁄𝐶𝑇# Equation 3.1-6

Where:

𝐼2𝑏# is the rated secondary current of reactor. (# =1, 2, 3)

𝐶𝑇# is 𝐶𝑇# ratio. (# =1, 2, 3)

3.2 Transformer Current Differential Protection (87T)

3.2.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  Diff Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  Diff
Settings

3.2.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 87T.I_Biased 0.050~5.000 0.001 p.u.
2 87T.I_Inst 0.050~20.000 0.001 p.u.
3 87T.I_Alm 0.050~1.500 0.001 p.u.
4 87T.I_Knee1 0.100~3.500 0.001 p.u.
5 87T.I_Knee2 4.000~8.000 0.001 p.u.
6 87T.Slope1 0.000~0.900 0.001 -
7 87T.Slope2 0.100~1.900 0.001 -
8 87T.Slope3 0.100~1.900 0.001 -
9 87T.K_Hm2_Inrush 0.050~0.800 0.001 -
10 87T.K_Hm3_Inrush 0.050~0.800 0.001 -
11 87T.K_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc 0.050~0.800 0.001 -

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-3


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


12 87T.En_Inst Enabled, Disabled - -
13 87T.En_Biased Enabled, Disabled - -
14 87T.En_DPFC Enabled, Disabled - -
WaveSym
15 87T.Opt_Inrush_Ident - -
Hm2
Adaptive,
16 87T.Opt_BlkMode_Inrush 2PBlk3P, - -
1PBlk3P
17 87T.En_Hm3_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3 18 87T.Opt_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc Hm3, Hm5 - -


19 87T.En_CTS_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3.2.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [87T.I_Biased]

It is the pickup setting of biased differential element.

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while transformer operates under
normal rated load, i.e.

[87T. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑈 + ∆𝑚)𝑝. 𝑢. Equation 3.2-1

Where:

𝑝. 𝑢. per unit value, is secondary rated current of transformer. (Please refer to section 3.1.1 for
the calculation of each side.)

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is reliability coefficient (generally 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.3~1.5).

𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the ratio errors of CT (k=0.03X2 for class 10P; k=0.01X2 for class 5P and TP).

∆𝑈 is the maximum deviation (in percent of rated voltage) due to tap changing within voltage
regulation range.

∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CT at all side, and 0.05 is
recommended.

Its recommended value: (0.2~0.5)p. u.

The settings, [87T.I_Biased], [87T.I_Inst] and [87T.I_Alm], are all based on


the secondary rated current of the transformer. If a setting value gained from
calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting shall be divided by
secondary rated current of this side of transformer, per unit value.

2. [87T.I_Inst]

3-4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is the current setting of instantaneous differential element. Instantaneous differential element


can clear serious internal fault quickly and prevent operation delay caused by CT saturation.

It shall be greater than inrush current of transformer, generally

[87𝑇. 𝐼_𝐼𝑛𝑠𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝. 𝑢. Equation 3.2-2

Where:

𝐾 is a multiple depending on the capacity of transformer and the impedance of power system.

𝐾 will be 3.0~6.0 for the transformer with capacity 40~120MVA and 2.0~5.0 for the transformer
with capacity above 120MVA. It is evident that the larger the transformer capacity or the power 3
system impedance, the smaller the 𝐾.

3. [87T.I_Alm]

It is the current setting of differential circuit abnormality alarm.

It shall be greater than maximum differential current when the tap of on-load tap-changing
transformer is not located in its middle position, or the maximum differential current caused by
other conditions.

The setting [87T.I_Alm] should be set less than the pickup setting
[87T.I_Biased], and normally between the value of maximum differential
current caused by the tap of on-load tap-changing transformer not located
in its middle position and the value of minimum pickup setting.

Its recommended value: 0.8×[87T.I_Biased].

4. [87T.I_Knee1]

It is the current setting of knee point 1 for transformer differential protection.

Its recommended value is 0.5.

5. [87T.I_Knee2]

It is the current setting of knee point 2 for transformer differential protection.

Its recommended value is 6.

6. [87T.Slope1], [87T.Slope2], [87T.Slope3]

They are slope 1, 2, 3 of biased differential element respectively. Their calculation methods
are provided here only for reference.

The calculation of unbalanced current is different with the different type of transformer.
Following equations are given to calculate the maximum unbalanced current Iunb.max
(secondary current) in differential scheme for two-winding and three-winding transformer:

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-5


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

 For two-windings transformer

𝐼𝑢𝑛𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 = (𝐾𝑎𝑝 𝐾𝑐𝑐 𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑈 + ∆𝑚) × 𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 Equation 3.2-3

Where:

The definitions about 𝐾𝑒𝑟 , ∆𝑈 and ∆𝑚 have been mentioned above.

𝐾𝑐𝑐 is the “same type coefficient” of CT, and 1.0 is recommended.

𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum value of fundamental component of external short-circuit current


(secondary value).
3 𝐾𝑎𝑝 is the coefficient of DC component.

𝐾𝑎𝑝 = 1.0 if CT at both sides are TP class, or 𝐾𝑎𝑝 = 1.5 - 2.0 if CT at both sides are P
class.

 For three-winding transformer

Take external short circuit fault at LV side as example:

𝐼𝑢𝑛𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐾𝑎𝑝 𝐾𝑐𝑐 𝐾𝑒𝑟 𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 + ∆𝑈ℎ 𝐼𝑘.ℎ.𝑚𝑎𝑥 + ∆𝑈𝑚 𝐼𝑘.𝑚.𝑚𝑎𝑥 + ∆𝑚𝐼 × 𝐼𝑘.𝐼.𝑚𝑎𝑥 + ∆𝑚𝐼𝐼 × 𝐼𝑘.𝐼𝐼.𝑚𝑎𝑥

Equation 3.2-4

Where:

The definition about 𝐾𝑎𝑝 𝐾𝑐𝑐 aand 𝐾𝑒𝑟 have been mentioned above.

∆𝑈ℎ and ∆𝑈𝑚 are the maximum deviations (in percent of rated voltage) at HV and MV
sides due to tap changing within voltage regulation range.

𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum value of fundamental component of the short-circuit secondary


current flowing through CT at the fault side during an external fault at LV side.

𝐼𝑘.ℎ.𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝐼𝑘.𝑚.𝑚𝑎𝑥 are the fundamental components of the secondary currents flowing
through CT at voltage regulating sides during this external fault.

𝐼𝑘.𝐼.𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝐼𝑘.𝐼𝐼.𝑚𝑎𝑥 are the fundamental components of the secondary currents flowing
through CT at other sides during this fault.

∆𝑚𝐼 and ∆𝑚𝐼𝐼 are the errors caused by difference between ratios of CT (auxiliary CT
included) at relevant sides.

The pickup current of differential element (secondary current) is:

𝐼𝑜𝑝..𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≥ 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 𝐼𝑢𝑛𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 Equation 3.2-5

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient (generally 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.3~1.5).

3-6 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Thus the maximum restraint coefficient is:

𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ⁄𝐼 Equation 3.2-6
𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum restraint current (secondary current), which is set according to
different restraint currents during a short-circuit fault at each side.

According to the setting [87T.I_Biased], the first keen point current 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.01 , the maximum
restraint current 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥 and the maximum restraint coefficient 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥 , the slope of
operation characteristic curve (𝐾𝑏𝑙 ) will be calculated as following:
3

[87𝑇. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑]
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑠 −
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠
𝐾𝑏𝑙 = Equation 3.2-7
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.01
1−
𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠

If 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 , and then

𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑚𝑎𝑥 − [87𝑇. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑]


𝐾𝑏𝑙 = Equation 3.2-8
𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.01

Therefore, when 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑠.01 = 0.5𝑝. 𝑢., and then the slope of biased differential element is:

𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑚𝑎𝑥 − [87𝑇. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑]


𝐾𝑏𝑙 = Equation 3.2-9
𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 0.5𝑝. 𝑢.

The recommended value is: [87T.Slope1]=0.2, [87T.Slope2]=0.5, [87T.Slope3]=0.75.

7. [87T.K_Hm2_Inrush]

It is the restraint coefficient of second harmonics for inrush current detection.

This parameter is the blocking threshold of the second harmonics in differential current when
the transformer is energized. Generally, it is set in the range of 0.1~0.2.

Its recommended value: 0.15.

8. [87T.K_Hm3_Inrush]

It is the restraint coefficient of third harmonics for inrush current detection.

The criterion of distinguishing the 3rd harmonic is added to block current differential protection
based on the facts that inrush involves 3rd harmonics. Generally, it is set in the range of
0.10~0.25.

Its recommended value: 0.20.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-7


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

9. [87T.K_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc]

It is the coefficient of third or fifth harmonic for overexcitation detection.

Its recommended value is 0.25.

10. [87T.En_Inst]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable instantaneous differential element of


transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual project.

11. [87T.En_Biased]

3 It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable conventional biased differential element
of transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual
project.

12. [87T.En_DPFC]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable DPFC biased differential element of
transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual project.

The protection settings of DPFC biased differential element have been fixed
in program and user does not need to set but only needs to select whether
the protection is enabled or not.

When the rated current of some side of transformer is relatively small (refer
to the related information in Section 3.6 of technical manual), DPFC biased
differential element must not be enabled. Otherwise, a corresponding alarm
message will be issued with the device being blocked.

13. [87T.Opt_Inrush_Ident]

It is used to select inrush current discrimination principle.

WaveSyn: waveform symmetry

Hm2: second harmonic principle

14. [87T.Opt_BlkMode_Inrush]

It is used to select inrush blocking mode.

Adaptive: self-adaptive one-phase inrush blocking one-phase differential element

2PBlk3P: two-phase inrush blocking three-phase differential element

1PBlk3P: one-phase inrush blocking three-phase differential element

15. [87T.En_Hm3_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable third harmonic blocking for inrush current.

3-8 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is recommended to be enabled.

16. [87T.Opt_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc]

It is used to select third or fifth harmonic for overexcitation criterion.

Hm3: third harmonic

Hm5: fifth harmonic

17. [87T.En_CTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable block biased differential element during
CT circuit failure. It is recommended to be set as “Disabled”.
3
3.2.4 Setting Example

Basic Parameters

Model SFP-60000/330 Winding connection mode Dyn1


Rated capacity 60MVA Rated voltage 330/132kV
Tap regulation range ±10% Impedance voltage percentage 13.92%
Zero-sequence impedance 39.99Ω/phase Cooling mode OFAF

Items High-voltage side CT Low-voltage side CT


CT ratio 400/1 400/1
CT class 5P 5P

Sn 60*1000
The HV-side primary rated current I1bH  = =105A
3U1nH 3*330

Sn 60*1000
The LV-side primary rated current I1bL  = =262A
3U1nL 3*132

I1bH 105
The HV-side secondary rated current I 2H    0.263 A
CTH 400

I1bL 262
The LV-side secondary rated current I 2L    0.655 A
CTL 400

1. [87T.I_Biased]

It should be greater than the maximum unbalance current while transformer operates under
normal rated load, i.e.

[87T. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑈 + ∆𝑚)𝑝. 𝑢. = 1.5 × (0.02 + 0.1 + 0.05) = 0.255𝑝. 𝑢.

In actual project, the setting value should be raised properly and take an integer number, here
the setting is set as 0.3p.u.

2. [87T.I_Inst]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-9


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

The transformer capacity is 60MVA, and the setting value shall be greater than inrush current
of transformer, then, according to the project experiences, the setting is set as 6p.u.

3. [87T.I_Alm]

It shall be greater than maximum differential current when the tap of on-load tap-changing
transformer is not located in its middle position, or the maximum differential current caused by
other conditions, and be below the pickup setting [87T.I_Biased] value 0.3p.u., here it takes
0.2p.u.

4. [87T.I_Knee1], [87T.I_Knee2]

3 According to the project experiences, take the recommended value 0.5p.u. for [87T.I_Knee1],
6p.u. for [87T.I_Knee1].

5. [87T.Slope1], [87T.Slope2], [87T.Slope3]

According to the project experiences, take the recommended value 0.2 for [87T.Slope1], 0.5
for [87T.Slope2], 0.75 for [87T.Slope3].

6. [87T.K_Hm2_Inrush], [87T.K_Hm3_Inrush]

According to the project experiences, take the recommended value 0.15 for
[87T.K_Hm2_Inrush], 0.2 for [87T.K_Hm3_Inrush].

7. [87T.K_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc]

According to the project experiences, the setting is set as 0.25.

8. [87T.En_Inst], [87T.En_Biased], [87T.En_DPFC]

These three logic control settings reflect serious fault, common fault, minor fault respectively,
all of they are set as “enabled”.

9. [87T.Opt_Inrush_Ident]

For the sake of convenience in the computation, it takes the second harmonic principle for
inrush current discrimination, so the setting is set as “Hm2”.

10. [87T.Opt_BlkMode_Inrush]

For ensure the priority of the protected equipment safety, it is recommended to set as “Adaptive”
(self-adaptive one-phase inrush blocking one-phase differential element).

11. [87T.En_Hm3_Blk]

For improving the ability of inrush current blocking, the setting is set as “Enabled”.

12. [87T.Opt_Hm3/Hm5_OvExc]

It prefers to adopt the fifth harmonic as overexcitation criterion, so the setting is set as “Hm5”.

13. [87T.En_CTS_Blk]

Set it as “Disabled” to disable CT circuit failure blocking 87T.

3-10 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.3 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF)

3.3.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  REF Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  REF
Settings

3.3.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.64REF.I_Biased 0.050~5.000 0.001 In 3
2 x.64REF.I_Alm 0.050~1.500 0.001 In
3 x.64REF.I_Knee 0.100~4.000 0.001 In
4 x.64REF.Slope 0.200~0.750 0.001 -
5 x.64REF.ROA 45.000~90.000 0.001 deg
6 x.64REF.I_NP_OnLoad 0.040~40.000 0.001 A
7 x.64REF.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
8 x.64REF.En Enabled, Disabled - -
9 x.64REF.En_NPCurr Enabled, Disabled - -
10 x.64REF.En_CTS_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -
11 x.64REF.En_Dir_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3.3.3 Setting Guidelines


REF can be equipped with each side of transformer, and they have the same setting principles.

1. [x.64REF.I_Biased]

It is the pickup current setting of REF.

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while transformer operates under
normal rated load, i.e.

[x. 64REF. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)𝐼𝑛 Equation 3.3-1

Where:

𝐼𝑛 is CT secondary rated current at side x of transformer.

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is reliability coefficient (generally 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.3~1.5).

𝐾𝑒𝑟 is CT ratio errors (for 10P class, 𝐾𝑒𝑟 = 0.03×2, and for 5P class and TP class, 𝐾𝑒𝑟 =0.01X2).

∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs, and 0.05 is recommended.

The pickup setting of REF takes the secondary rated current of CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) as its unit,
whose setting value is calculated with the reference to the side having the minimum ratio
among all CTs for REF (the ratio of the maximum primary current to the minimum primary

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-11


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

current among each side CT is within 4 times). If it is the actual current value to the reference
side in actual setting calculation, then this actual value will be divided by the secondary rated
current of CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) to derive the setting value.

In actual projects, the pickup current setting can be set according to the value greater than the
measured unbalance current of zero-sequence differential circuit under the maximum load
current.

The setting should not be less than 0.1In and the recommended value is 0.2In~0.5In.

3 The unit (i.e. In) of the setting calculation ([x.64REF.I_Biased]) is the


secondary rated current of CT, and the minimum corrected coefficient of the
side is taken as the reference side (the ratio of the maximum primary current
to the minimum primary current among each side CT is within 4 times). If a
setting value got from calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting
value shall be divided by the secondary rated current of CT to get per unit
value which is the configuration value input to the device.

2. [x.64REF.I_Alm]

It is the current setting of REF abnormality alarm. This setting should be greater than maximum
unbalance current during normal operation.

Its recommended value is 0.1~0.3In, or [x.64REF.I_Biased]×0.8.

3. [x.64REF.I_Knee]

It is the knee point setting of REF

Its recommended value is 0.5In.

4. [x.64REF.Slope]

It is the percentage restraint coefficient of REF.

The setting is percent restraint coefficient of winding differential protection, which shall be
greater than unbalance current caused by zero-sequence current flowing through the
transformer during an external fault.

The setting calculation equation is given below.

[x. 64REF. Slope] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑎𝑝 × 𝐾𝑐𝑐 × 𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚) Equation 3.3-2

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is reliability coefficient.

𝐾𝑎𝑝 = 1.0 if CT at both sides are TP class, or 𝐾𝑎𝑝 =1.5~2.0 if CT at both sides are P class.

𝐾𝑐𝑐 is the “same type coefficient” of CT, and 1.0 is recommended.

3-12 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the ratio errors of CT.

∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs.

Generally, in practical setting calculation for projects, [x.64REF.Slope] can be taken as 0.30.7,
and its recommended value is 0.5.

5. [x.64REF.ROA]

It is the operation angle setting of REF. The larger the value is, the wider the operation range
is. The smaller the value is, the narrower the operation range is.

When the CT ratio difference of each side is relatively large and the used CTs are Class P, the
recommended value of the setting is 45°~ 60°to ensure the reliability. 3
When the CT ratio difference of each side is relatively small and the used CTs are Class TP,
the recommended value of the setting is 60°~ 90°to ensure the sensitivity.

The recommended value according to project experiences: 60°.

6. [x.64REF.I_NP_OnLoad]

This is the current setting of neutral-point on-load criterion.

The setting should be greater than the maximum residual current due to phase-to-phase fault,
three-phase fault and three-phase grounding fault. If there is no actual calculated or measured
data, it usually takes the half of [x.64REF.I_Biased] as the setting value. The recommended
range: 0.1In~0.5In. (Note: the unit of setting) [x.64REF.En_NPCurr] is “A”, and the unit of
setting [x.64REF.I_Biased] is “In”, so unit conversion is required.)

7. [x.64REF.t_Op]

It is the time delay setting for REF.

Its recommended value is 0 if restricted earth fault protection is required to instantaneous


tripping. Otherwise, it can be set as 50~100ms.

8. [x.64REF.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable REF of the corresponding side.

9. [x.64REF.En_NPCurr]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable neutral current criterion.

It is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.

10. [x.64REF.En_CTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable block REF during CT circuit failure.

11. [x.64REF.En_Dir_Blk]

It is the logic setting for enabling or disabling the function of direction criterion blocking REF. It
is recommended to be enabled when the CT transient characteristics is not well. If enabled,

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-13


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

the operation time of REF will have a relay of about 10~20ms.

When REF is enabled, if the maximum CT ratio to the minimum CT ratio


related to the protection is greater than 128, this will be considered
abnormal and wrong setting alarm will be issued.

3.3.4 Setting Example

Basic Parameters
3 Model SFP-60000/330 Winding connection mode Dyn1
Rated capacity 60MVA Rated voltage 330/132kV
Tap regulation range ±10% Impedance voltage percentage 13.92%
Zero-sequence impedance 39.99Ω/phase Cooling mode OFAF

Items High-voltage side CT Low-voltage side CT


CT ratio 400/1 400/1
CT class 5P 5P

HV-side minimum short-circuit current under minimum operation mode 1000A


HV-side three-phase short circuit current under maximum operation mode 6000A

1. [x.64REF.I_Biased]

[x. 64REF. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)𝐼𝑛 = 1.5 × (0.02 + 0.05) = 0.105𝐼𝑛

Considering the maximum short-circuit secondary current is 15A and the error due to the actual
CT characteristic, the pickup current value can be set as “0.3In”.

2. [x.64REF.I_Alm]

This setting value should be below the setting [x.64REF.I_Biased] value 0.3In, and be
greater than the maximum unbalance current, here, it considers to take 0.2In as the setting
value.

3. [x.64REF.I_Knee]

Take the recommended value, 0.5In.

4. [x.64REF.Slope]

Take the recommended value, 0.5.

5. [x.64REF.ROA]

Take the recommended value, 60°.

6. [x.64REF.I_NP_OnLoad]

3-14 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

The setting value takes the half of setting [x.64REF.I_Biased] value (i.e. 0.15In), the rated
secondary current of CT is 1A, so this setting value can be set as “0.15A”.

7. [x.64REF.t_Op]

Because the protection uses the 5P class CT, whose transient characteristic is not well, and
the system short-circuit current is relatively large, so the setting is set as “40ms”.

8. [x.64REF.En]

Set it as “Enabled” to enable the 64REF function.

9. [x.64REF.En_NPCurr]

Set it as “Enabled” to enable the neural current criterion.


3
10. [x.64REF.En_CTS_Blk]

Set it as “Disabled” to disable CT circuit failure blocking REF.

11. [x.64REF.En_Dir_Blk]

Considering the protection uses the 5P class CT, the setting is set as “Enabled” to enable the
direction criterion for ensuring the protection reliability.

3.4 Winding Differential Protection (87W)

3.4.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  WdgDiff Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  WdgDiff
Settings

3.4.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 87W.I_Biased 0.100~5.000 0.001 In
2 87W.I_Alm 0.050~1.500 0.001 In
3 87W.I_Knee 0.100~4.000 0.001 In
4 87W.Slope 0.100~0.900 0.001 -
5 87W.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
6 87W.En_PhSeg Enabled, Disabled - -
7 87W.En_REF Enabled, Disabled - -
8 87W.En_CTS_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3.4.3 Setting Guidelines


Winding differential protection can be equipped with each side of transformer, and they have the
same setting principles.

1. [87W.I_Biased]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-15


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is the pickup current of winding differential protection.

1) For winding differential protection,

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while transformer operates on
normal rated load, i.e.

[87W. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)𝐼𝑛 Equation 3.4-1

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is reliability coefficient (generally 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.3~1.5).


3 𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the ratio errors of CT (for 10P class, 𝐾𝑒𝑟 = 0.03×2, and for 5P and TP class,
𝐾𝑒𝑟 =0.01×2).

∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs, and 0.05 is recommended.

𝐼𝑛 is CT rated secondary current at side x of transformer.

The pickup setting of the winding differential protection takes the secondary rated current
of CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) as its unit, whose setting value is calculated with the reference to
the side having the minimum ratio among all CTs for the winding differential protection
(the ratio of the maximum primary current to the minimum primary current among each
side CT is within 4 times). If it is the actual current value to the reference side in actual
setting calculation, then this actual value will be divided by the secondary rated current of
CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) to derive the setting value.

In actual projects, the measured unbalance current of the winding differential circuit under
the maximum load current can be referred to.

The setting should not be less than 0.1In, and the recommended value for winding
differential protection is 0.2In~0.5In.

2) For stub differential protection, the recommended value is 0.5In~1In. For the primary value
of the setting, please refer to the setting calculation result of the corresponding busbar
protection.

The unit (i.e. In) of the setting calculation ([87W.I_Biased]) is the secondary
rated current of CT, and the minimum corrected coefficient of the side is
taken as the reference side (the ratio of the maximum primary current to the
minimum primary current among each side CT is within 4 times). If a setting
value got from calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting value
shall be divided by the secondary rated current of CT to get per unit value
which is the configuration value input to the device.

2. [87W.I_Alm]

3-16 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is the current setting of winding differential protection abnormality alarm, this setting should
be greater than the maximum unbalance current during normal operation.

Its recommended value is 0.1~0.3In, or [87W.I_Biased]×0.8.

3. [87W.I_Knee]

It is the knee point setting of biased winding differential protection

Its recommended value is 0.5.

4. [87W.Slope]

It is the percentage restraint coefficient of biased winding differential protection.


3
Its calculation equation is given below.

[87W. 𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑎𝑝 𝐾𝑐𝑐 𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚) Equation 3.4-2

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient.

𝐾𝑎𝑝 =1.0 if CT at both sides are TP class, or 𝐾𝑎𝑝 =1.5~2.0 if CT at both sides are P class.

𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the ratio errors of CT.

𝐾𝑐𝑐 is the “same type coefficient” of CT, and 1.0 is recommended.

∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs.

Generally, in practical setting calculation for projects, it can be taken as 0.30.7 and its
recommended value is 0.5.

5. [87W.t_Op]

It is the time delay setting for 87W.

Its recommended value is 0 if 87W protection is required to instantaneous tripping. Otherwise,


it can be set as 20~100ms.

6. [87W.En_PhSeg]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable phase-segregated winding differential


protection.

7. [87W.En_REF]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable residual winding differential protection.

8. [87W.En_CTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable block winding differential protection
during CT circuit failure

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-17


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

When winding differential protection is enabled, if the maximum CT ratio to


the minimum CT ratio related to the protection is greater than 256, this will
be considered abnormal and wrong setting alarm will be issued.

3.4.4 Setting Example

Basic Parameters

Model SFP-60000/330 Winding connection mode Dyn1

3 Rated capacity 60MVA Rated voltage 330/132kV


Tap regulation range ±10% Impedance voltage percentage 13.92%
Zero-sequence impedance 39.99Ω/phase Cooling mode OFAF

Items High-voltage side circuit breaker CT High-voltage side bushing CT


CT ratio 800/1 400/1
CT class 5P 5P

HV-side minimum short-circuit current under minimum operation mode 1000A


HV-side three-phase short circuit current under maximum operation mode 6000A

87W can be used as the current differential protection of stub of bushing and circuit breaker.

1. [87W.I_Biased]

The ratios of circuit breaker and bushing CTs are 800/1A, 400/1A respectively, and

𝐼 800
𝐾𝑤𝑏 = min ( 1𝑛_𝑚𝑎𝑥 , 4) = min ( , 4) = 2 < 4
𝐼1𝑛_𝑚𝑖𝑛 400

So taking the rating of CT with the smaller ration 400/1A as the reference value.

Then the secondary minimum short-circuit current under minimum operation mode is
1000A/400=2.5A.

For ensuring the sensitivity coefficient is more than 2, the setting value is set as “1In”.

2. [87W.I_Alm]

It is essential to consider the maximum unbalance current, the typical value is 0.2In.

3. [87W.I_Knee]

Take the recommended value 0.5.

4. [87W.Slope]

Take the recommended value 0.5.

5. [87W.t_Op]

3-18 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

In case of stub fault, it usually requires cutting off the related equipment rapidly, so this setting
is set as “0”.

6. [87W.En_PhSeg]

Set it as “Enabled”.

7. [87W.En_REF]

The stub current differential protection adopts phase-separated differential element, which can
provide the high sensitivity, so it needn’t to configure the REF element, and the setting can be
set as “Disabled”.

8. [87W.En_CTS_Blk] 3
It can be set as “Disabled” to disable CT circuit failure blocking 87W.

3.5 Reactor Current Differential Protection (87R)

3.5.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  Diff Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  Diff
Settings

3.5.2 Setting List

No. Item Range Step Unit


1 87R.I_Biased 0.050~5.000 0.001 p.u.
2 87R.I_Inst 0.050~20.000 0.001 p.u.
3 87R.I_Alm 0.050~1.500 0.001 p.u.
4 87R.Slope 0.100~0.900 0.001 -
5 87R.K_Hm2_Inrush 0.050~0.800 0.001 -
6 87R.K_Hm3_Inrush 0.050~0.800 0.001 -
7 87R.En_Inst Enabled, Disabled - -
8 87R.En_Biased Enabled, Disabled - -
9 87R.En_DPFC Enabled, Disabled - -
10 87R.En_REF Enabled, Disabled - -
11 87R.En_CTS_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3.5.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [87R.I_Biased]

It is the pickup setting of biased differential element.

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while reactor operates under normal
rated load. The sensitivity is checked according to the earth fault at the pre-level CT of LV-side
CT of reactor, when the reliability and the sensitivity cannot be satisfied at the same time, the
reliability takes the priority.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-19


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

For the reactor with dual-CT in HV side, its recommended value: 0.5p.u.

For the reactor with single-CT in HV side, its recommended value: 0.3p.u.

2. [87R.I_Inst]

It is the current setting of instantaneous differential element. Instantaneous differential element


can clear serious internal fault quickly and prevent operation delay caused by CT saturation.

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current under the condition of transient
disturbance.

For the reactor with dual-CT in HV side, it should be greater than the differential current caused
3 by the transmission difference of HV-side dual-CT due to the external crossing fault, its
recommended value: 6p.u.

For the reactor with single-CT in HV side, its recommended value: 4p.u.

3. [87R.I_Alm]

It is the current setting of differential circuit abnormality alarm.

It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while reactor operates under normal
rated load, and be less than the pickup setting [87R.I_Biased].

Its recommended value: 0.1~0.3pu, or 0.8×[87T.I_Biased].

4. [87R.Slope]

It is the slope of biased differential element. The recommended value is: 0.5.

5. [87R.K_Hm2_Inrush]

It is the restraint coefficient of second harmonics for inrush current detection.

Its recommended value: 0.2.

6. [87R.K_Hm3_Inrush]

It is the restraint coefficient of third harmonics for inrush current detection.

Its recommended value: 0.25

7. [87R.En_Inst]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable instantaneous differential element of


transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual project.

8. [87R.En_Biased]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable conventional biased differential element
of transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual
project.

9. [87R.En_DPFC]

3-20 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable DPFC biased differential element of
transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual project.

The protection settings of DPFC biased differential element have been fixed
in program and user does not need to set but only needs to select whether
the protection is enabled or not.

10. [87R.En_REF]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable restricted earth fault element of
transformer current differential protection. It is recommended to be enabled in an actual project.
3
11. [87R.En_CTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable block biased differential element during
CT circuit failure. It is recommended to be set as “Disabled”.

3.5.4 Setting Example

Basic Parameters

Rated capacity 100MVA Rated voltage 500kV


Wiring mode Line reactor, single circuit breaker arrangement

Items High-voltage side (head-end) Low-voltage side (tail-end)


CT ratio 600/1 600/1
CT class 5P 5P

1. [87R.I_Biased]

Considering the line reactor in single circuit breaker arrangement, the setting value takes the
recommended one, 0.3p.u.

2. [87R.I_Inst]

Take the recommended value, 4p.u.

3. [87R.I_Alm]

It should be above the maximum unbalance current under normal load condition, here, take
“0.2p.u.”.

4. [87R.Slope]

Take the recommended value, 0.5.

5. [87R.K_Hm2_Inrush]

Take the recommended value, 0.2.

6. [87R.K_Hm3_Inrush]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-21


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Take the recommended value, 0.25.

7. [87R.En_Inst]

The instantaneous differential element represents serious failure, set the setting as “Enabled”
to enable the element.

8. [87R.En_Biased]

Set it as “Enabled”.

9. [87R.En_DPFC]

3 The DPFC differential element can detect minor failure, set the setting as “Enabled” to enable
the element.

10. [87R.En_REF]

The REF element reflects earth fault, set the setting as “Enabled” to enable the element.

11. [87R.En_CTS_Blk]

It can be set as “Disabled” to disable CT circuit failure blocking 87R.

3.6 Inter-turn Fault Protection (21IT)

3.6.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  IntTurn Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  IntTurn
Settings

3.6.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 21IT.En Enabled, Disabled - -
2 21IT.En_Curr_LVS Enabled, Disabled - -

3.6.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [21IT.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable inter-turn fault protection.

2. [21IT.En_Curr_LVS]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the LV-side current for inter-turn fault
protection calculation. It is suitable for the reactor with two branches at high-voltage side, but
without high-voltage side bushing CT configured.

3-22 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.7 Overexcitation Protection (24)

3.7.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  OvExc Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  OvExc
Settings

3.7.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 24Cal.U1n 0.000~2000.000 0.001 kV 3
2 24Cal.Opt_Up/Upp Up, Upp - -
3 24DT1.K_Set 1.000~1.600 0.001 -
4 24DT1.t_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
5 24DT1.En Enabled, Disabled - -
6 24DT2.K_Set 1.000~1.600 0.001 -
7 24DT2.t_Alm 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
8 24DT2.En Enabled, Disabled - -
9 24IDMT.K0_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
10 24IDMT.t0_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
11 24IDMT.K1_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
12 24IDMT.t1_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
13 24IDMT.K2_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
14 24IDMT.t2_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
15 24IDMT.K3_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
16 24IDMT.t3_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
17 24IDMT.K4_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
18 24IDMT.t4_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
19 24IDMT.K5_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
20 24IDMT.t5_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
21 24IDMT.K6_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
22 24IDMT.t6_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
23 24IDMT.K7_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
24 24IDMT.t7_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
25 24IDMT.K8_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
26 24IDMT.t8_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
27 24IDMT.K9_Set 1.000~1.700 0.001 -
28 24IDMT.t9_Op 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
29 24IDMT.K_Alm 0.500~1.000 0.001 -
30 24IDMT.t_Cooling 0.100~9999.000 0.001 s
31 24IDMT.En_Trp Enabled, Disabled - -
32 24IDMT.En_Alm Enabled, Disabled - -

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-23


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.7.3 Setting Guidelines

Please input the corresponding values of selected 10 points of


overexcitation curve of transformer to the device and the values of 10 points
are distributed averagely.

For the settings calculation related to inverse-time curve overexcitation


protection, it is necessary to convert the inverse-time curve into 10 specific
overexcitation points. Inverse-time curve is based on the actual operation
3 voltage, so users need not calculate VT ratio when configure settings.

Inverse-time overexcitation protection is set with reference to the curve


given by the transformer manufactory. The relation among all settings of
inverse-time overexcitation protection is:

[24IDMT.K9_Set]<[24IDMT.K8_ Set]<…<[24IDMT.K1_Set]<[24IDMT.K0_
Set]

[24IDMT.t0_Op]<[ 24IDMT.t1_ Op]<…<[24IDMT.k8_ Op] <[24IDMT.t9_ Op]

1. [24Cal.U1n]

It is used to set reference voltage of overexcitation calculation, and it is usually set as primary
rated voltage at calculated side of transformer.

2. [24Cal.Opt_Up/Upp]

It is the voltage option between phase voltage and phase-to-phase voltage for calculation of
overexcitation protection.

Up: phase voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

Its recommended value is Up, i.e. phase voltage.

3. [24DT1.K_Set]

It is the multiple setting of stage 1 of definite-time overexcitation protection for trip purpose.

According to overexcitation curve provided by manufacturer of the transformer, it should select


high-value stage for tripping purpose.

4. [24DT1.t_Op]

It is the time delay setting of stage 1 of definite-time overexcitation protection for trip purpose.

According to overexcitation curve provided by manufacturer of the transformer, it should select


short time delay for tripping purpose.

5. [24DT1.En]

3-24 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage 1 of definite-time overexcitation


protection for trip purpose.

6. [24DT2.K_Set]

It is the multiple setting of stage 2 of definite-time overexcitation protection for alarm purpose.

According to overexcitation curve provided by manufacturer of the transformer, it should select


low-value stage for alarm purpose. It is recommended to make the transformer long-time
operation.

The setting value isn’t recommended to be too small, otherwise the system will return after a
short time of overexcitation, and the overexcitation alarm may not follow the return.
3
This setting value is recommended to be greater than 1.05Umax (Umax is the maximum
steady-state operation voltage of the equipment).

7. [24DT2.t_Alm]

It is the time delay setting of stage 2 of definite-time overexcitation protection for alarm purpose,
which shall be set as required.

Its recommended value is 10s.

8. [24DT2.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage 2 of definite-time overexcitation


protection for alarm purpose.

9. [24IDMT.K0_Set]

It is the highest-limit multiple setting of inverse-time overexcitation protection: n0.

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

10. [24IDMT.t0_Op]

It is the time delay setting corresponding to highest-limit setting: t0.

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

11. [24IDMT.Ki_Set]

It is the multiple setting i of inverse-time overexcitation protection: ni. (i=1, 2 …, 8)

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

12. [24IDMT.ti_Op]

It is the time delay setting corresponding to multiple setting i: ti. (i=1, 2 …, 8)

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

13. [24IDMT.K9_Set]

It is the lowest-limit multiple setting of inverse-time overexcitation: n9.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-25


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

14. [24IDMT.t9_Op]

It is the time delay setting corresponding to lowest-limit multiple setting: t9.

It shall be set with reference to overexcitation curve given by the transformer manufactory.

15. [24IDMT.K_Alm]

It is the coefficient of time delay of inverse-time overexcitation protection for alarm purpose.
When the actual overexcitation time is greater than the theoretical operation time (i.e.,
[24IDMT.K_Alm] * [24IDMT.tn_Op]), the device will issue the alarm signal.
3 Its recommended value is 0.7.

16. [24IDMT.t_Cooling]

It is the cooling time of inverse-time overexcitation protection.

It is used to clear the accumulated time after inverse-time overexcitation protection dropps off.
Its recommended value is 10s.

17. [24IDMT.En_Trp]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable inverse-time overexcitation protection


for trip purpose

18. [24IDMT.En_Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable inverse-time overexcitation protection


for alarm purpose

3.8 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)

3.8.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  OC Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  OC


Settings

3.8.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.50/51P.VCE.Upp 10.000~100.000 0.001 V
2 x.50/51P.VCE.U2 2.000~57.000 0.001 V
3 x.50/51P.VCE.3U0 2.000~57.000 0.001 V
Disabled
4 x.50/51P.VCE.En_VTS_Blk - -
Enabled
5 x.50/51P.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
6 x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
7 x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °

3-26 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


8 x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
9 x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
Upp
10 x.50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt Up - -
U1
11 x.50/51P.DIR.I_Min 0.050~1.000 0.001 In
12 x.50/51P.DIR.U_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
13 x.50/51P.DIR.En_VTS_Blk - -
Enabled
14 x.50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001 - 3
15 x.50/51P.HMB.I_Rls 2.000~150.000 0.001 A
16 x.50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk PhaseBlk, CrossBlk, MaxPhaseBlk - -
17 x.50/51Pi.I_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
18 x.50/51Pi.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
19 x.50/51Pi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
20 x.50/51Pi.En_Volt_Blk - -
Enabled
NonDirectional
21 x.50/51Pi.Opt_Dir Forward - -
Reverse
Disabled
22 x.50/51Pi.En_Hm_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
23 x.50/51Pi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
24 x.50/51Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
25 x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve - -
IECN
IECV
IEC
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
26 x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst -

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-27


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


DefTime
IDMT
27 x.50/51Pi.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001 -
28 x.50/51Pi.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
29 x.50/51Pi.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001 -
30 x.50/51Pi.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001 -
31 x.50/51Pi.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001 -

3.8.3 Setting Guidelines


3 Phase overcurrent protection can be provided with up to six stages for high-voltage side, middle-
voltage side, low-voltage side 1 and side 2 respectively, and up to three stages for common winding
side, each stage has separated current setting, time delay and control logic.

1. [x.50/51P.VCE.Upp]

The voltage control element is set according to the phase-to-phase voltage; the low voltage
blocking setting can be set based on the following formula.

𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[𝑥. 50/51𝑃. 𝑉𝐶𝐸. 𝑈𝑝𝑝] =
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙

Where:

𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the possible minimum phase-to-phase voltage during normal operation, which can be
normally set as 0.9Un (Un is VT rated secondary value, it is the phase-to-phase voltage);

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, 1.1~1.2;

In the practice, it is constantly set as 0.6~0.8Un.

2. [x.50/51P.VCE.U2]

The negative-sequence voltage blocking setting should be above the unbalance voltage during
normal operation, the unbalance voltage value can be determined through actual
measurement. Generally, it is 4%~8% of the rated phase-to-ground voltage.

3. [x.50/51P.VCE.3U0]

The residual voltage setting should be larger than the maximum residual voltage during normal
operation.

4. [x.50/51P.VCE.En_VTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of VT circuit failure blocking
voltage control element in 50/51P.

5. [x.50/51P.DIR.RCA]

It is the characteristic angle of directional phase overcurrent element.

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of phase

3-28 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

current, using phase current with phase polarized voltage to determine the direction of phase
current in forward direction or reverse direction.

This parameter defines the system impedance angle of positive-sequence circuit. The default
value is 45 degree.

Ua

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating
area
Ia
3
Operating area in
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51P.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] Non-operating
area

Figure 3.8-1 The direction element operation characteristics when phase A voltage is polarized

6. [x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.

7. [x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.

8. [x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.

9. [x.50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]

The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.

10. [x.50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt]

The voltage polarization mode for direction control element of phase overcurrent protection

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-29


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage polarized

Up: phase-to-ground voltage polarized

U1: positive-sequence voltage polarized

11. [x.50/51P.DIR.I_Min]

The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of phase overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 0.05In.

12. [x.50/51P.DIR.U_Min]

3 The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of phase overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 4V.

13. [x.50/51P.DIR.En_VTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of VT circuit failure blocking
direction control element in 50/51P.

14. [x.50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]

It is the percent setting of the harmonic control element of phase overcurrent protection.

In order to prevent mal-operation of the phase overcurrent protection due to the energizing of
transformer, second harmonic element can be used to block phase overcurrent protection.
When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of phase
current is larger than the percent setting, harmonic blocking element operates to block phase
overcurrent protection if corresponding logic setting is enabled ([50/51Px.En_Hm_Blk] is set
as "Enabled").

If second harmonic component of phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.04In) then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.

The recommended value is 0.15.

15. [x.50/51P.HMB.I_Rls]

It is the current setting of releasing harmonic blocking function of phase overcurrent protection.

It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended
to set as 20In.

16. [x.50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk]

The setting used to select the harmonic blocking mode of phase overcurrent protection.

PhaseBlk: phase blocking

CrossBlk: cross blocking

MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase blocking

3-30 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

17. [x.50/51Pi.I_Set]

It is current setting for stage i of phase overcurrent protection. This setting can be set according
to the following principles,

1) Set it according to the rated current of transformer.

It shall be greater than the rated current of the transformer:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
[𝑥. 50/51𝑃𝑖. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐼
𝐾𝑟 2𝑛

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, which can be taken as 1.2.


3
𝐾𝑟 is the drop-off coefficient, which can be taken as 0.95.

𝐼2𝑛 is the rated current of the transformer (secondary value).

2) Set it in coordination with other overcurrent protection.

[𝑥. 50/51𝑃𝑖. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧

Where:

𝐾𝑝 is the coordination coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15-1.25.

𝐾𝑏𝑟 is the branch coefficient of current, which is equal to the ratio of the current passing
through the device to the current passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at
the end of protection section of the coordinated stage of overcurrent protection of the
power line.

𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of overcurrent protection to be coordinated.

3) The setting should be sensitive enough during a busbar fault at local end.

𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛
[𝑥. 50/51𝑃𝑖. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛

Where:

𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 is the sensitivity coefficient, which can be set as 1.5.

𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum current value during a short-circuit fault at the local bus.

When the coordination is not considered, the recommended value is:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
[𝑥. 50/51𝑃𝑖. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = × 𝐼𝑛
𝐾𝑟

Where:

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.2

𝐾𝑟 =0.95

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-31


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

4) For inverse-time characteristic

The setting is set according the rated current of transformer, which can be set equal to the
minimum current value of definite-time phase overcurrent protection.

When it coordinates with other overcurrent protection, the recommended value is:

[𝑥. 50/51𝑃𝑖. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧

Where:

𝐾𝑝 is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.


𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of overcurrent protection to be coordinated.
3
5) To be used as overload alarm

It can be taken as 1.1 times of the rated current.

18. [x.50/51Pi.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of definite time phase overcurrent protection.

1) In coordination with the main protection of the transformer:

[x.50/51Pi.t_Op]=0.5s

2) In coordination with phase-to-phase overcurrent protection of the line:

[x.50/51Pi.t_Op]=tmax+Δt

Where:

tmax is the maximum time delay for line protection.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

3) For the time delays of the different stage, the following formula is recommended.

tn+1=tn+Δt

Where:

tn+1 is the time delay of stage i+1.

tn is the time delay of stage i.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5s.

19. [x.50/51Pi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of phase overcurrent protection, the default value is 0.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When I <0.95*𝐼𝑝 ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 , and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown
in the following figure:

3-32 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I>Ip

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
3
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.8-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection

20. [x.50/51Pi.En_Volt_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable voltage control element for stage i of
phase overcurrent protection.

21. [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Dir]

It is used to select direction for stage i of phase overcurrent protection.

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

22. [x./51Pi.En_Hm_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable second harmonic blocking for stage i of
phase overcurrent protection.

23. [x.50/51Pi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of phase overcurrent protection.

24. [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enabling stage i of phase overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-33


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

25. [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve]

It is used to select characteristic curve for stage i of phase overcurrent protection.

Because the operating time is longer if the fault is closer to opposite power supply source,
inverse-time phase overcurrent protection is used to shorten the operating time.

The user can select the operating characteristic from various inverse-time characteristic curves
by the setting [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics for selection
are shown in the following table.

x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr

3 ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1


ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may configure
[x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic,
constants K, α and C with configuration tool software.

26. [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut]

The setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage i of phase overcurrent
protection.

Inst: instantaneous drop-out

DefTime: definite-time drop-out

IDMT: inverse-time drop-out

When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined


inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.

When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out

3-34 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI


inverse-time drop-out.

 Instantaneous drop-out

When I <0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When I <0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [x.50/51Pi.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the
following figure:

Start time
3
I>Ip

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.8-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection

 Inverse-time drop-out

When 𝐼 > 𝐼𝑝 , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the


accumulated value after 𝑡𝑝 (Assuming 𝑡𝑝 is less than the theoretical operating time) is
calculated according to the following equation:

𝑡𝑝
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 = ∫ 𝑑𝑡
𝑡(𝐼)
0

At this time, if 𝐼 <0.95* 𝐼𝑝 , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-35


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

characteristic meets the following equation:

𝑇𝑅
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 − ∫ 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼)
0

Where:

𝑇𝑅 is the drop-out time;

𝑡𝑅 (𝐼) is the drop-out characteristic equation

When 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:


3 𝑡𝑟
𝑡𝑅 = { } × 𝑇𝑀𝑆
1 − (𝐼/𝐼𝑝 )2

Where:

𝐼𝑝 is the current setting [50/51Px.I_Set];

TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.TMS];

𝑡𝑟 is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to
0 after the protection operates.

𝐼 is the measured current.

When 0.95*𝐼𝑝 < 𝐼 <𝐼𝑝 , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out

The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

IP I

Figure 3.8-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of phase overcurrent protection

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in
the inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:

3-36 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I>Ip

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Operating threshold
Protection
operate
3
Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient


Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.8-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of phase overcurrent protection

27. [x.50/51Pi.TMS]

It is time multiplier setting for stage i of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
overcurrent protection.

28. [x.50/51Pi.tmin]

It is minimum operating time for stage i of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[x.50/51Pi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [x.50/51Pi.tmin]
automatically.

If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.

Where:

tmin is minimum operation time of other protections.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.

29. [x.50/51Pi.K]

It is constant “K” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic phase overcurrent


protection.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-37


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Pi.K] is useful.

30. [x.50/51Pi.Alpha]

It is constant “α” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic phase overcurrent


protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
3 inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Pi. Alpha] is useful.

31. [x.50/51Pi.C]

It is constant “C” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic phase overcurrent


protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Pi.C] is useful.

3.9 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection (50/51G)

3.9.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  ROC Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  ROC
Settings

3.9.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.50/51G.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
2 x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
3 x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °
4 x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
5 x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
6 x.50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min 0.050~1.000 0.001 In
7 x.50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
8 x.50/51G.DIR.En_VTS_Blk - -
Enabled
Ext
9 x.50/51G.DIR.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
10 x.50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2 0.100~1.000 0.001 -
11 x.50/51G.HMB.I_Rls 2.000~150.000 0.001 A

3-38 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


Ext
12 x.50/51G.HMB.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
Ext
13 x.50/51Gi.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
14 x.50/51Gi.3I0_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
15 x.50/51Gi.t_Op 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
16 x.50/51Gi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
NonDirectional
17 x.50/51Gi.Opt_Dir Forward - -
Reverse 3
Disable
18 x.50/51Gi.En_Hm_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
19 x.50/51Gi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
20 x.50/51Gi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN
ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
21 x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve - -
IECN
IECV
IEC
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
22 x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime - -
IDMT
23 x.50/51Gi.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001 -
24 x.50/51Gi.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
25 x.50/51Gi.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001 -
26 x.50/51Gi.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001 -
27 x.50/51Gi.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001 -

3.9.3 Setting Guidelines


Earth fault protection can be provided with up to four stages, each stage has separated current

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-39


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

setting, time delay and control logic.

1. [x.50/51G.DIR.RCA]

It is the characteristic angle of directional earth fault element.

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of zero-
sequence current, using zero-sequence current with zero-sequence voltage to determine the
direction of zero-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction. For transformer
protection, when the polarity of the three-phase CT is on the busbar side and the polarity of
the transformer neutral point CT points to the transformer, if the calculated residual current is
used to calculate the direction, the characteristic angle is recommended to be 75°. If the
3 residual current of the neutral point CT is used to calculate the direction, the recommended
characteristic angle is 255°.

-U0

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I0
area

Operating area in
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51G.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

Figure 3.9-1 The direction element operation characteristics when zero-sequence voltage is polarized

2. [x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection,
the recommended value is 90 degree.

3. [x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection,
the recommended value is 90 degree.

4. [x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection,

3-40 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

the recommended value is 90 degree.

5. [x.50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]

The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection,
the recommended value is 90 degree.

6. [x.50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min]

The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of earth fault
overcurrent protection, its recommended value is 0.05In.

7. [x.50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min]

The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of earth fault
3
overcurrent protection, its recommended value is V. If the sensitivity of high resistance ground
fault need to be considered, the recommended value is 0.5~2V. If it is necessary to cooperate
with other protection with direction element, it is recommended to be 0.5~1V greater than other
protection.

8. [x.50/51G.DIR.En_VTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of VT circuit failure blocking
direction control element in 50/51G.

9. [x.50/51G.DIR.Opt_3I0]

The setting is used to select the residual current that used for direction control element in
50/51G.

Ext: the measured residual current

Cal: the calculated residual current

10. [x.50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2]

It is the percent setting of second harmonic component for blocking earth fault protection.

When the percentage of the second harmonic component to fundamental component of


residual current is greater than the setting [x.50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking
element operates to block earth fault protection if corresponding logic setting
[x.50/51Gi.En_Hm_Blk] is enabled.

If second harmonic component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.04In) then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.

Its recommended value is 0.15.

11. [x.50/51G.HMB.I_Rls]

It is the current setting of releasing harmonic blocking function of earth fault overcurrent
protection.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-41


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It shall be greater than possible maximum inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended
to set as 20In.

12. [x.50/51G.HMB.Opt_3I0]

The setting is used to select the residual current that used for harmonic control element in
50/51G.

Ext: the measured residual current

Cal: the calculated residual current

13. [x.50/51Gi.Opt_3I0]
3 The setting is used to select the residual current that used for stage i of earth fault overcurrent
protection.

Ext: the measured residual current

Cal: the calculated residual current

14. [x.50/51Gi.3I0_Set]

It is current setting for stage i of earth fault overcurrent protection.

1) Earth fault overcurrent protection of the transformer normally coordinates with the earth
fault overcurrent protection of the line.

[𝑥. 50/51𝐺𝑖. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑜

Where:

Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the
end of protected section of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line. Maximum
value among various operation conditions can be taken.

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability factor, which is taken as 1.1.


𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑜 is the setting (secondary value) of the coordinated stage of residual protection of line.

2) The setting should be sensitive enough during a busbar fault at local end.

𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛
[𝑥. 50/51𝐺𝑖. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛

Where:

𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 is the sensitivity coefficient, which can be set as 1.5.

𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum residual current value during a busbar short-circuit fault at the end.

3) If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum unbalanced current of the


system. The recommended value is (0.3~0.5)p.u. (p.u. is secondary rated current at side
x of the transformer.)

3-42 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

4) When it is used as inverse-time protection, the calculation principle is

[𝑥. 50/51𝐺𝑖. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧

Where:

𝐾𝑝 is coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.

𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of inverse-time ROC to be coordinated

5) When it is used for a grounding transformer, it should be larger than the line capacitive
current.

15. [x.50/51Gi.t_Op]
3
It is time delay for stage i of earth fault protection.

1) It coordinates with the corresponding earth fault protection of the line.

[x.50/51G1.t_Op]=tmax+Δt

Where:

tmax is the maximum operation time delay of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of
the line.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

2) If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum operation time of system


pole discrepancy.

3) For the time delays of the different stage, the following formula is recommended.

tn+1=tn+Δt

Where:

tn+1 is the time delay of stage i+1.

tn is the time delay of stage i.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

16. [x.50/51Gi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of earth fault overcurrent protection, the default value is 0.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the setting
[x.50/51Gi.t_DropOut]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-43


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating

3 signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.9-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection

17. [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Dir]

It is used to select direction for stage i of earth fault overcurrent protection.

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

18. [x.50/51Gi.En_Hm_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of harmonic control element
blocking stage i of earth fault overcurrent protection.

19. [x.50/51Gi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of earth fault overcurrent
protection.

20. [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enabling stage i of earth overcurrent protection operate to
trip or alarm.

21. [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve]

3-44 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is used to select characteristic curve for stage i of earth overcurrent protection.

Earth fault overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard inverse
time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by
the setting [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the
curve is shown in the table below.

x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr


ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85 3
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may configure
[x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic,
constants K, α and C with configuration tool software.

22. [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve_DropOut]

The setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage i of earth fault overcurrent
protection.

Inst: instantaneous drop-out

DefTime: definite-time drop-out

IDMT: inverse-time drop-out

When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined


inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.

When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-45


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

 Instantaneous drop-out

When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the
setting [x.50/51Gi.t_Drop-out]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

Start time

3 I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.9-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection

 Inverse-time drop-out

When 𝐼0 > 𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the
accumulated value after 𝑡𝑝 (Assuming 𝑡𝑝 is less than the theoretical operating time) is
calculated according to the following equation:

𝑡𝑝
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 = ∫ 𝑑𝑡
𝑡(𝐼0 )
0

At this time, if 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out
characteristic meets the following equation:

3-46 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

𝑇𝑅
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 − ∫ 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼)
0

Where:

𝑇𝑅 is the drop-out time;

𝑡𝑅 (𝐼) is the drop-out characteristic equation

When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:

𝑡𝑟
𝑡𝑅 = {
1 − (𝐼0 /𝐼0𝑝 )2
} × 𝑇𝑀𝑆
3
Where:

I0P is the current setting [x.50/51Gi.3I0_Set];

TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [x.50/51Gi.TMS];

𝑡𝑟 is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to
0 after the protection operates.

𝐼0 is the measured current.

When 0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 <𝐼0 <𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out

The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

I0 P I0

Figure 3.9-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of earth fault overcurrent protection

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating
accumulator in the inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-47


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

3 Operating threshold
Protection
operate

Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient


Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.9-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of earth fault overcurrent protection

23. [x.50/51Gi.TMS]

It is time multiplier setting for stage i of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time earth
fault overcurrent protection.

24. [x.50/51Gi.tmin]

It is minimum operating time for stage i of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[x.50/51Gi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [x.50/51Gi.tmin]
automatically.

If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.

Where:

tmin is minimum operation time of other protections.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.

25. [x.50/51Gi.K]

It is constant “K” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault overcurrent
protection.

3-48 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Gi.K] is useful.

26. [x.50/51Gi.Alpha]

It is constant “α” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault overcurrent
protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Gi.Alpha] is useful. 3
27. [x.50/51Gi.C]

It is constant “C” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault overcurrent
protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Gi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Gi.C] is useful.

3.10 Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection (50/51Q)

3.10.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  NegOC Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  NegOC
Settings

3.10.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.50/51Q.DIR.RCA -180~179 1 °
2 x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 1 °
3 x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 1 °
4 x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 1 °
5 x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 1 °
6 x.50/51Q.DIR.I_Min 0.050~1.000 0.001 In
7 x.50/51Q.DIR.U_Min 1.000~10.000 0.001 V
Disabled
8 x.50/51Q.DIR.En_VTS_Blk - -
Enabled
9 x.50/51Qi.I2_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
10 x.50/51Qi.t_Op 0.030~100.000 0.001 s
11 x.50/51Qi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
12 x.50/51Qi.Opt_Dir NonDirectional - -

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-49


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


Forward
Reverse
Disabled
13 x.50/51Qi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
14 x.50/51Qi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm
ANSIE
ANSIV
ANSIN

3 ANSIM
ANSIDefTime
ANSILTE
ANSILTV
ANSILT
15 x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve - -
IECN
IECV
IEC
IECE
IECST
IECLT
IECDefTime
UserDefine
Inst
16 x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime - -
IDM
17 x.50/51Qi.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001 -
18 x.50/51Qi.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
19 x.50/51Qi.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001 -
20 x.50/51Qi.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001 -
21 x.50/51Qi.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001 -

3.10.3 Setting Guidelines


Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be provided with up to two stages, each stage has
separated current setting, time delay and control logic.

1. [x.50/51Q.DIR.RCA]

It is the characteristic angle of directional negative-sequence overcurrent element.

By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of negative-
sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to
determine the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction.
The recommended value is 45°.

3-50 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

-U2

[x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I2
area

[x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
Operating area in
forward direction

[x.50/51Q.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction
3

[x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

Non-operating
area

[x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

Figure 3.10-1 The direction element operation characteristics of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection

2. [x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection, its recommended value is 90 degree.

3. [x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection, its recommended value is 90 degree.

4. [x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection, its recommended value is 90 degree.

5. [x.50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]

The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection, its recommended value is 90 degree.

6. [x.50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min]

The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection, its recommended value is 0.05In.

7. [x.50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min]

The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of negative-sequence

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-51


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

overcurrent protection, its recommended value is 4V.

8. [x.50/51Q.DIR.En_VTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of VT failure blocking
direction control element in 50/51Q.

9. [x.50/51Qi.I2_Set]

It is current setting for stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection of the transformer is usually used by coordinating


with negative-sequence overcurrent protection of the generator.
3
[x. 50/51Qi. I2_Set] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝

Where:

𝐾𝑏𝑟 is coordination coefficient, which is equal to the ratio of negative-sequence current passing
through the transformer to negative-sequence current passing through the generator.

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability factor, which is taken as 1.1.


𝐼𝑜𝑝 is the setting of coordinated stage of negative-sequence overcurrent protection of the
generator.

10. [x.50/51Qi.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

[x.50/51Qi.t_Op]=tmax+Δt

Where:

tmax is time delay of coordinated stage of negative-sequence overcurrent protection of the


generator.

Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5s.

If multi-stage negative-sequence overcurrent protection is used, the time differential between


stages can be Δt=0.3s~0.5s.

11. [x.50/51Qi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection, the default
value is 0.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼2 <0.95*𝐼2𝑝 ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the setting [x.50/51Qi.t_Drop-
out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

3-52 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I2>I2p

Start
signal

Operating
signal
3
Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.10-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

12. [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Dir]

It is used to select direction for stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

Non_Directional: no direction

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

13. [x.50/51Qi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection.

14. [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enabling stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent


protection operate to trip or alarm.

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose.

15. [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-53


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is used to select characteristic curve for stage i of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard
inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating
curve by the setting [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] (i=1 or 2), the relationship between the value of the
setting and the curve is shown in the table below.

x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr


ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46

3 ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85


ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

Only when the setting [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [x.50/51Qi.K], [x.50/51Qi.C] and
[x.50/51Qi.Alpha] are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three
settings.

16. [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve_DropOut]

The setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage i of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.

Inst: instantaneous drop-out

DefTime: definite-time drop-out

IDMT: inverse-time drop-out

When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined


inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.

When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.

3-54 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

 Instantaneous drop-out

When 𝐼2 <0.95*𝐼2𝑝 , the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When 𝐼2 <0.95*𝐼2𝑝 , the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the
setting [50/51Qx.t_Drop-out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the
following figure:

Start time

I2>I2p
3

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.10-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

 Inverse-time drop-out

When 𝐼2 > 𝐼2𝑝 , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the
accumulated value after 𝑡𝑝 (Assuming 𝑡𝑝 is less than the theoretical operating time) is
calculated according to the following equation:

𝑡𝑝
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 = ∫ 𝑑𝑡
𝑡(𝐼2 )
0

At this time, if 𝐼2 <0.95*𝐼2𝑝 , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out
characteristic meets the following equation:

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-55


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

𝑇𝑅
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 − ∫ 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼2 )
0

Where:

𝑇𝑅 is the drop-out time;

t R (I2 ) is the drop-out characteristic equation

When 𝐼2 <0.95*𝐼2𝑝 , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:

3 t R (I2 ) = {
tr
2 } × TMS
1 − (I2 /I2p )

Where:

I2p is the current setting [50/51Qx.I2_Set];

TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.TMS];

t r is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to
0 after the protection operates.

I2 is the measured negative-sequence current.

When 0.95*I2p <I2 <I2p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out.

The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

Figure 3.10-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating
accumulator in the inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:

3-56 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

I2>I2p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Operating threshold
Protection
operate
3
Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient


Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.10-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of negative-sequence overcurrent protection

17. [x.50/51Qi.TMS]

It is time multiplier setting for stage i of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-tie
negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

18. [x.50/51Qi.tmin]

It is minimum operating time for stage i of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent


protection.

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[x.50/51Qi.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of the setting
[x.50/51Qi.tmin] automatically.

Its recommended value is 0.02s.

19. [x.50/51Qi.K]

It is constant “K” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic negative-sequence


overcurrent protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent


protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Qi.K] is useful.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-57


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

20. [x.50/51Qi.Alpha]

It is constant “α” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic negative-sequence


overcurrent protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent


protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Qi. Alpha] is useful.

21. [x.50/51Qi.C]
3 It is constant “C” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent


protection.

Only when the setting [x.50/51Qi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.50/51Qi. C] is useful.

3.11 Thermal Overload Protection (49)

3.11.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  ThOvLd Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  ThOvLd
Settings

3.11.2 Setting List

No. Item Range Step Unit


1 x.49.Ib_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
2 x.49.K_Trp 1.000~3.000 0.001 -
3 x.49.K_Alm 1.000~3.000 0.001 -
4 x.49.Tau 0.100~100.000 0.001 min
5 x.49.K_T_Diff 0.000~200.000 0.001 -
6 x.49.Alpha_Cold 1.000~2.000 0.001 -
7 x.49.C_Disspt 0.100~10.000 0.001 -
Disabled
8 x.49.En_Trp - -
Enabled
Disabled
9 x.49.En_Alm - -
Enabled

3.11.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.49.Ib_Set]

It is the base current setting of thermal overload protection.

3-58 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is generally recommended to be set equal to the rated current of the protected equipment.

2. [x.49.K_Trp]

It is the tripping setting of thermal capacity for thermal overload protection.

It shall be set according actual requirements, and generally be set as 1.2~1.5.

3. [x.49.K_Alm]

It is the alarm setting of thermal capacity for thermal overload protection

It shall be set according to actual requirements, and generally be set as 1.1~1.3.

4. [x.49.Tau] 3
It is the thermal time constant.

It is determined by the thermal characteristic of the equipment.

5. [x.49.K_T_Diff]

It is the convertor coefficient from the current to the temperature.

It is used to calculate the temperature difference between transformer windings and oil, which
should be provided by transformer manufacturers.

Generally, the setting is set between 20 and 30.

6. [x.49.Alpha_Cold]

It is the cooling mode of equipment, usually

For the thermal overload protection using method 1 (please refer to the technical manual for
the detailed information about method 1 and method 2), it is recommended to take 2.

For the thermal overload protection using method 2, the setting takes different values under
different cooling conditions, usually between 1.6 and 2.

7. [x.49.C_Disspt]

It is the heat dissipation time constant setting.

When the equivalent heating current Ieq is lower than 0.04In, the thermal time constant adopts
the value of [x.49.Tau]*[x.49.C_Disspt], and the time constants of heat accumulation and heat
dissipation are different in the case. When the setting is set as “1”, the same time constant is
used for heat accumulation and heat dissipation.

For special generators and motors, set the setting value according to the parameters provided
by the manufacturer.

For other application scenarios, its recommended value is 1.

8. [x.49.En_Trp]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable thermal overload protection operate to

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-59


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

trip.

9. [x.49.En_Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable thermal overload protection operate to
alarm.

3.12 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

3.12.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  BFP Settings


3 PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  BFP
Settings

3.12.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.50BF.I_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
2 x.50BF.3I0_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
3 x.50BF.I2_Set 0.050~200.000 0.001 A
4 x.50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
5 x.50BF.t1_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
6 x.50BF.t2_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s
Disabled
7 x.50BF.En - -
Enabled
Disabled
8 x.50BF.En_ReTrp - -
Enabled
Disabled
9 x.50BF.En_t1 - -
Enabled
Disabled
10 x.50BF.En_t2 - -
Enabled
Disabled
11 x.50BF.En_Ip - -
Enabled
Disabled
12 x.50BF.En_3I0_1P - -
Enabled
Disabled
13 x.50BF.En_3I0_3P - -
Enabled
Disabled
14 x.50BF.En_I2_3P - -
Enabled
Disabled
15 x.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl - -
Enabled
Disabled
16 x.50BF.En_Alm_Init - -
Enabled

3-60 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.12.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.50BF.I_Set]

It is used to set the phase current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.

The measured phase current is used to detect the circuit breaker failure. The setting should
can detect the fault with small fault current. It could be chosen in accordance with the most
sensitive protection function that initiate the breaker failure protection.

2. [x.50BF.3I0_Set]

It is used to set the zero-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.
3
In the high impedance grounded systems, the residual current is normally much smaller than
the short-circuit currents for the single-phase earth fault. In order to reliably detect the circuit
breaker failure under the single-phase earth fault, it is necessary to add the zero-sequence
current detection by the setting [x.50BF.En_3I0_1P] (set as "Enabled"). At this time, the phase
current setting [x.50BF.I_Set] could be set more sensitive.

Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, zero-sequence current
criterion and negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase
overcurrent element for breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [x.50BF.ExTrp3P]
from external tripping. They can be enabled or disabled by the settings [x.50BF.En_3I0_3P]
and [x.50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.

The setting [x.50BF.3I0_Set] shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current
(3I0) under normal operation condition.

3. [x.50BF.I2_Set]

It is used to set the negative-sequence current setting of detecting breaker failure protection.

The setting [x.50BF.I2_Set] shall be greater than maximum negative-sequence unbalance


current (I2) under normal operation condition.

Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [x.50BF.3I0_Set].

4. [x.50BF.t_ReTrp]

It is used to set the re-trip time delay of breaker failure protection.

The setting defines the time delay of re-tripping for breaker failure protection, generally set as
5ms~50ms.

Its recommended value is 50ms.

5. [x.50BF.t1_Op]

It is used to set the time delay for the first stage of breaker failure protection.

Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip local circuit breaker
when the time delay of [x.50BF.t1_Op] is expired. The setting [x.50BF.t1_Op] is set as short as

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-61


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable.

The recommended setting principle is as follows.

[x.50BF.t1_Op]=t0+tB+Δt

Where:

t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.

tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.

Δt is safty margin time, generally taken as 0.03s.

3 Normally, it is used to trip local circuit breaker again before the second stage of breaker failure
protection operating in case that the local circuit breaker could open to prevent to trip the
adjacent circuit breakers.

Its recommended value is 0.1s.

6. [x.50BF.t2_Op]

It is used to set the time delay for the second stage of breaker failure protection.

Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip adjacent circuit
breakers when the time delay of [x.50BF.t2_Op] is expired. The setting [x.50BF.t2_Op] is set
as short as possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is
warrantable and undesired operation must be avoided. Besides, the setting should be greater
than the setting [x.50BF.t1_Op] with safety margin.

The recommended setting principle is as follows.

[x.50BF.t2_Op]=t0+tB+Δt

Where:

t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.

tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.

Δt is safty time, generally taken as 0.1s.

Its recommended value is 0.2s.

The stage of breaker failure protection with time delay of [x.50BF.t1_Op] will
only trip local circuit breaker by three phase, and the stage with time delay
of [x.50BF.t2_Op] will trip all adjacent circuit breakers.

7. [x.50BF.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable breaker failure protection.

8. [x.50BF.En_ReTrp]

3-62 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is used to enable/disable re-trip function of breaker failure protection.

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the instantaneous re-tripping function is in service.

After receiving tripping signal from the device and the corresponding current criterion or CB
position criterion is met, then the re-trip command will be issued to trip local circuit breaker.

9. [x.50BF.En_t1]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the first time delay function of BFP.

10. [x.50BF.En_t2]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the second time delay function of BFP.
3
11. [x.50BF.En_3I0_1P]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable zero-sequence current criterion of BFP
via external single-phase initiating signal "x.50BF.ExTrpA", "x.50BF.ExTrpB" or
"x.50BF.ExTrpC".

Its setting principle can refer to the one of setting [x.50BF.3I0_Set].

12. [x.50BF.En_Ip]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable phase overcurrent element of breaker
failure protection via external three-phases initiating signal "x.50BF.ExTrp3P".

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the phase current criterion via external three-phases
initiating signal "x.50BF.ExTrp3P" is valid.

13. [x.50BF.En_3I0_3P]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable zero-sequence current criterion of BFP
via external three-phase initiating signal "x.50BF.ExTrp3P".

Its setting principle can refer to the one of setting [x.50BF.3I0_Set].

14. [x.50BF.En_I2_3P]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable negative-sequence current criterion of


BFP via external three-phase initiating signal “x.50BF.ExTrp3P”.

Its setting principle can refer to the one of setting [x.50BF.3I0_Set].

15. [x.50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable breaker failure protection initiated by CB
open position via external three-phase initiating signal “x.50BF.ExTrp3P”.

For some special protection (for example, mechanical protection or voltage protection), the
fault current maybe is too small to meet the current criterion when they operate. In order to
make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, CB open position
is used instead of the current criterion. The precondition is that binary input signal
[x.50BF.ExTrp_WOI] should be assigned by external trip signal.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-63


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

16. [x.50BF.En_Alm_Init]

It is used to enable/disable abnormality check of breaker failure initiating signal.

It is used to enable/disable the supervision of binary input initiating signal of breaker failure
protection. If the setting is set as "Enabled", and the initiating status of the binary input signal
maintains more than 10s, then the binary input initiating signal will be considered as invalid
and an alarm "x.50BF.Alm_Int" will be issued. If it is set as "Disabled", then the binary input
signal will not be supervised.

3.13 Phase Overvoltage Protection (59P)


3 3.13.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  OV Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  OV


Settings

3.13.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


3P
1 x.59Pi.Opt_1P/3P - -
1P
Up
2 x.59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp - -
Upp
3 x.59Pi.U_Set 57.700~200.000 0.001 V
4 x.59Pi.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001 -
5 x.59Pi.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
6 x.59Pi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
7 x.59Pi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
8 x.59Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm
ANSIDefTime
IECDefTime
9 x.59Pi.Opt_Curve - -
UserDefine
InvTime_U
Inst
10 x.59Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut - -
DefTime
11 x.59Pi.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001 -
12 x.59Pi.tmin 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
13 x.59Pi.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.001 -
14 x.59Pi.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.001 -
15 x.59Pi.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001 -

3-64 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3.13.3 Setting Guidelines


Overvoltage protection can be provided with up to two stages, each stage has separated setting,
time delay and control logic.

1. [x.59Pi.Opt_1P/3P]

It is used to select 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for stage i of 59P.

3P: 3-out-of-3 mode

1P: 1-out-of-3 mode

When this setting is set as “1P”, overvoltage protection will operate if any phase voltage or 3
phase-to-phase voltage is over voltage. When this setting is set as “3P”, overvoltage protection
will operate only if three-phase voltages or three phase-to-phase voltages are over voltage.

2. [x.59Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]

It is used to select phase-to-phase voltage or phase voltage.

Up: phase voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

3. [x.59Pi.U_Set]

It is voltage setting for stage i of overvoltage protection.

This setting should be set according to the actual isolation requirements of the system
equipment. This setting should also be set according to the logic setting [x.59P.Opt_Up/Upp].
If the setting [x.59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [x.59Pi.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. If the setting
[x.59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[x.59Pi.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.

Generally, it shall be set according to the affordability of protected equipment:

 For definite-time charactertistic

[x. 59Pi. U_Set] = (1.1~1.5)𝑈𝑛

Where:

Un: the second rated voltage.

Application example

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 1.3 times Un is


assigned for overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[x.59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp

[x.59Pi.U_Set]=143V

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 1.3 times Un is

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-65


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

assigned for overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[x.59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up

[x.59Pi.U_Set]=82.55V

 For inverse-time characteristic

If inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting should be configured as follows.

[x. 59Pi. U_Set] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈𝑚𝑎𝑥

Where:

3 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient of and can be 1.05~1.1.

𝑈𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the minimum voltage under which the protected equipment can operate for a long
term, if the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, the 𝑈𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the phase-to-
phase voltage, otherwise it is the phase-to-ground voltage.

4. [x.59Pi.K_DropOut]

It is the drop-out coefficient of stage i of phase overvoltage protection.

Its recommended value is 0.98.

5. [x.59Pi.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of overvoltage protection.

It shall be set according to the affordability of protected equipment, and its recommended value
is 0.3s~1s.

6. [x.59Pi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of phase overvoltage protection.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When U


<[x.59Pi.K_Drop-out]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of

the setting [x.59Pi.t_Drop-out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

3-66 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

U>Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal
3
Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.13-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection

Its recommended value is 0.

7. [x.59Pi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of overvoltage protection.

8. [x.59Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage i of phase overvoltage protection operate to
trip or alarm.

9. [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve]

It is used to select characteristic curve for stage i of overvoltage protection.

Phase overvoltage protection can support definite-time limit, inverse time limit and user-
defined time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by the setting
[x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] , the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown
in the table below.

x.59Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c


ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - -
UserDefine UserDefine

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-67


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

x.59Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c


InvTime_U InvCrv_U 1 1 0

When the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the
corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [x.59Pi.K], [x.59Pi.C] and
[x.59Pi.Alpha] are useless.

When the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings
[x.59Pi.K], [x.59Pi.C] and [x.59Pi.Alpha].

When the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-


3 time overvoltage protection.

10. [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut]

It is the setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage i of phase overvoltage
protection.

Inst: instantaneous drop-out

DefTime: definite-time drop-out

 Instantaneous drop-out

When U <[x.59Pi.K_Drop-out]* Up , the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When U <[x.59Pi.K_Drop-out]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡dr (i.e.

the value of the setting [x.59Pi.t_Drop-out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown
in the following figure:

3-68 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

U>Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal
3
Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.13-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection

11. [x.59Pi.TMS]

It is time multiplier setting for stage i of inverse-time overvoltage protection.

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
overvoltage protection.

12. [x.59Pi.tmin]

It is minimum delay for stage i of inverse-time overvoltage protection.

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[x.59Pi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [x.59Pi.tmin]
automatically.

Its recommended value is 0.02s.

13. [x.59Pi.K]

It is constant “K” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.

Only when the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.59Pi.K] is useful.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-69


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

14. [x.59Pi.Alpha]

It is constant “Alpha” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage


protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.

Only when the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.59Pi. Alpha] is useful.

15. [x.59Pi.C]

It is constant “C” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage protection.


3 It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.

Only when the setting [x.59Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.59Pi. C] is useful.

3.14 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59G)

3.14.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  ROV Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  ROV
Settings

3.14.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


Ext
1 x.59Gi.Opt_3U0 - -
Cal
2 x.59Gi.3U0_Set 1.000~200.000 0.001 V
3 x.59Gi.K_DropOut 0.930~1.000 0.001 -
4 x.59Gi.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
5 x.59Gi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
6 x.59Gi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
7 x.59Gi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm

3.14.3 Setting Guidelines


Residual overvoltage protection can be provided with up to two stages, each stage has separated
setting, time delay and control logic.

1. [x.59Gi.Opt_3U0]

It is the option of measured residual voltage or calculated residual voltage for stage i of residual
overvoltage protection.

3-70 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Ext: the measured residual voltage

Cal: the calculated residual voltage

2. [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]

It is the voltage setting of stage i of residual overvoltage protection.

It shall be greater than maximum unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.

 For small current earthed system:

The residual overvoltage protection is generally used for alarm. It shall be larger than
maximum unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.
3
0.5×𝑈2𝑛
Using the calculated residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n is VT secondary
1.732

rated voltage)

0.5×𝑈2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using the open-delta residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n_Delt is open-
1.732

delta VT secondary rated voltage)

 For gap earthed system

2×𝑈2𝑛
Using the calculated residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n is VT secondary rated
1.732

voltage)

1.8×𝑈2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using the open-delta residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n_Delt is open-
1.732

delta VT secondary rated voltage, the VT ratio of the open-delta VT in the gap overvoltage
system is usually U1n/(U2n*1.732). For example, if U2n is 100V, U2n_Delt will be 173V.

 For single-phase earth fault of unearthed system

1.2×𝑈2𝑛
Using calculated residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n is VT secondary rated
1.732

voltage)

1.2×𝑈2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using open-delta residual voltage: [x.59Gi.3U0_Set]= (U2n_Delt is open-delta VT
1.732

secondary rated voltage, the VT ratio of the open-delta VT in the unearthed system is
usually U1n/(U2n/1.732). For example, if U2n is 100V, U2n_Delt will be 57.73V.

3. [x.59Gi.K_DropOut]

It is the drop-out coefficient of stage i of residual overvoltage protection.

Its recommended value is 0.98.

4. [x.59Gi.t_Op]

It is time delay of stage i of residual overvoltage protection.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-71


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It shall be set to keep the stage protection away from the influence of transient characteristic
and its recommended value is 0.3s~0.5s.

5. [x.59Gi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of residual overvoltage protection.

The supported drop-out characteristics of the residual overvoltage protection include


instantaneous drop-out and definite-time drop-out.

 Instantaneous drop-out

When [x.59Gi.t_DropOut] is set as “0”, the drop-out characteristics is instantaneous drop-


3 out.

When U0<[x.59Gi.K_DropOut]*U0p, the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When [x.59Gi.t_DropOut] is not set as “0”, the drop-out characteristics is definite-time


drop-out.

When U0<[x.59Gi.K_DropOut]*U0p, the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e.
the value of the setting [x.59Gi.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown
in the following figure:

Start time

U0>U0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.14-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of residual overvoltage protection

3-72 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Its recommended value is 0.

6. [x.59Gi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of residual overvoltage protection

7. [x.59Gi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage i of residual overvoltage protection operate
to trip or alarm.

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose


3
3.15 Phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)

3.15.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  UV Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  UV


Settings

3.15.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


3P
1 x.27Pi.Opt_1P/3P - -
1P
Up
2 x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp - -
Upp
None
Curr
3 x.27Pi.Opt_LogicMode CBPos - -
CurrOrCBPos
CurrAndCBPos
4 x.27Pi.U_Set 5.000~120.000 0.001 V
5 x.27Pi.K_DropOut 1.000 ~1.200 0.001 -
6 x.27Pi.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
7 x.27Pi.t_DropOut 0.000~100.000 0.001 s
Disabled
8 x.27Pi.En_VTS_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
9 x.27Pi.En - -
Enabled
Trp
10 x.27Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm - -
Alm
ANSIDefTime
11 x.27Pi.Opt_Curve IECDefTime - -
UserDefine

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-73


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


InvTime_U
Inst
12 x.27Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut -
DefTime
13 x.27Pi.TMS 0.040~20.000 0.001 -
14 x.27Pi.tmin 0.030~10.000 0.001 s
15 x.27Pi.K 0.0010~120.0000 0.0001 -
16 x.27Pi.Alpha 0.0100~3.0000 0.0001 -
17 x.27Pi.C 0.0000~1.0000 0.0001 -

3 3.15.3 Setting Guidelines


Undervoltage protection can be provided with up to two stages, each stage has separated setting,
time delay and control logic.

1. [x.27Pi.Opt_1P/3P]

It is used to select 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for stage i of undervoltage protection.

3P: 3-out-of-3 mode

1P: 1-out-of-3 mode

When this setting is set as “1P”, undervoltage protection will operate if any phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage is under voltage. When this setting is set as “3P”, undervoltage
protection will operate only if three-phase voltages or three phase-to-phase voltages are under
voltage.

2. [x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]

It is used to select phase-to-phase voltage or phase voltage as voltage criterion for stage i of
undervoltage protection.

Up: phase voltage

Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

3. [x.27Pi.Opt_LogicMode]

The breaker closed position check mode is configured via the setting [x.27P.Opt_LogicMode],
it includes:

[x.27P.Opt_LogicMode]=None: no-check;

[x.27P.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr: check the current;

[x.27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos: check the breaker position;

[x.27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos: check the current and the breaker position;

[x.27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos: check the current or the breaker position.

The checked breaker position refers to the closed position of the breaker.

3-74 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Select the check mode according to the actual situation on site. When the load current is
relatively fixed and is larger than 0.04In, the current criterion is recommended, such as the
capacitor and reactor load. Otherwise, the breaker position criterion is recommended.

When the breaker position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In,
comprehensive criterion can also be used.

For the case the incoming line breaker have been tripped and the busbar loses voltage, low-
voltage protection is still desired to operate at this time, the breaker position criterion needs to
be selected.

4. [x.27Pi.U_Set]

It is voltage setting for stage i of undervoltage protection.


3
This setting should be set according to the actual stability level of power system, but it should
ensure sensitive enough to the fault at the end of the line and not be greater than the minimum
operation voltage under normal conditions. This setting should also be set according to the
setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]. If the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-
to-phase voltage will be used for calculation, [x.27Pi.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase
voltage. If the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase voltage will be used for
calculation, [x.27Pi.U_Set] should be set as phase voltage.

Application example

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 0.7 times Un is assigned
for undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp

[x.27Pi.U_Set]=77V

If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 0.7 times Un is assigned
for undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:

[x.27Pi.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up

[x.27Pi.U_Set]=44.45V

5. [x.27Pi.K_DropOut]

It is the drop-out coefficient of stage i of phase undervoltage protection.

Its recommended value is 1.03.

6. [x.27Pi.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of undervoltage protection.

It shall be set according to voltage control strategy.

7. [x.27Pi.t_DropOut]

The drop-out time setting of stage i of phase undervoltage protection.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-75


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When


U>[x.27Pi.K_Drop-out]*Up, the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [x.27Pi.t_Drop-out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

Start time

U<Up

3 Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.15-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of undervoltage protection

Its recommended value is 0.

8. [x.27Pi.En_VTS_Blk]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the function of VT circuit failure blocking
stage i of undervoltage protection.

9. [x.27Pi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of undervoltage protection.

10. [x.27Pi.Opt_Trp/Alm]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage i of phase undervoltage protection operate
to trip or alarm.

Trp: for tripping purpose

Alm: for alarm purpose

3-76 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

11. [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve]

It is used to select characteristic curve for stage i of undervoltage protection.

Undervoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit, it can also operate with an
inverse-time limit. Undervoltage protection can support definite-time limit, inverse time limit
and user-defined limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by the setting
[x.27Pi.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown
in the table below.

x.27Pi.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c


ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - 3
UserDefine UserDefine
InvTime_U InvCrv_U 1 1 0

When the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the
corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [x.27Pi.K], [x.27Pi.C] and
[x.27Pi.Alpha] are useless.

When the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings
[x.27Pi.K], [x.27Pi.C] and [x.27Pi.Alpha].

When the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-


time undervoltage protection.

12. [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve_DropOut]

It is the setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage i of phase undervoltage
protection.

Inst: instantaneous drop-out

DefTime: definite-time drop-out

 Instantaneous drop-out

When U>[x.27Pi.K_Drop-out]* Up, the protection drops out immediately.

 Definite-time drop-out

When U > [x.27Pi.K_Drop-out]*Up, the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e.
the value of the setting [x.27Pi.t_Drop-out]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown
in the following figure:

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-77


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Start time

U<Up

Start
signal

Operating

3 signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.15-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of undervoltage protection

13. [x.27Pi.TMS]

It is time multiplier setting for stage i of inverse-time undervoltage protection.

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
undervoltage protection.

14. [x.27Pi.tmin]

It is minimum delay for stage i of inverse-time undervoltage protection.

When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[x.27Pi.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [x.27Pi.tmin]
automatically.

Its recommended value is 0.03s.

15. [x.27Pi.K]

It is constant “K” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.

Only when the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.27Pi.K] is useful.

3-78 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

16. [x.27Pi.Alpha]

It is constant “Alpha” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage


protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.

Only when the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.27Pi. Alpha] is useful.

17. [x.27Pi.C]

It is constant “C” for stage i of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage protection.

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.


3
Only when the setting [x.27Pi.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-
time characteristic is selected, the setting [x.27Pi. C] is useful.

3.16 Overfrequency Protection (81O)


3.16.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  FreqProt Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  FreqProt
Settings

3.16.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 81Oi.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V
2 81Oi.f_Set 50.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
3 81Oi.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
4 81Oi.En Disabled, Enabled - -

3.16.3 Setting Guidelines


Overfrequency protection can be provided with up to two stages, each stage has separated setting,
time delay and control logic.

1. [81Oi.Upp_Blk]

When any phase-to-phase voltages is lower than the setting [81Oi.Upp_Blk], the
overfrequency protection will be blocked.

This setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. Its recommended value is
0.7Un(Un is rated phase-to-phase voltage).

2. [81Oi.f_Set]

It is frequency setting for stage i of overfrequency protection.

All stages can be set based on the same graduation. After rejecting some power supplies and

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-79


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

each stage operating, the system frequency should be restored near rated frequency. Because
compound mode of generators (hydroelectric, thermal power, nuclear power with different
capacity and proportion, different adaptability to abnormal frequency), system structure and
operation mode are different in different power system, they should be set according to system
frequency and stability control strategy.

3. [81Oi.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of overfrequency protection.

It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy.

3 4. [81Oi.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of overfrequency protection.

3.17 Underfrequency Protection (81U)


3.17.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  FreqProt Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  FreqProt
Settings

3.17.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 81Ui.Upp_Blk 10.000~150.000 0.001 V
2 81Ui.f_Set 45.000~60.000 0.001 Hz
3 81Ui.t_Op 0.100~100.000 0.001 s
4 81Ui.En Disabled, Enabled - -

3.17.3 Setting Guidelines


Underfrequency protection can be provided with up to four stages, each stage has separated
setting, time delay and control logic.

1. [81Ui.Upp_Blk]

When any phase-to-phase voltages is lower than the setting [81Ui.Upp_Blk], the
underfrequency protection will be blocked.

This setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. Its recommended value is
0.7Un (Un is rated phase-to-phase voltage).

2. [81Ui.f_Set]

It is frequency setting for stage i of underfrequency protection.

All stages can adopt cascade connection, and small graduation can be set among them, for
example, taking 0.2Hz. Selecting one special stage, it can avoid system frequency always
keeping in a certain frequency. When some loads are shed after other stages of

3-80 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

underfrequency protection operate to shed major loads and make system frequency restore to
normal value.

3. [81Ui.t_Op]

It is time delay for stage i of underfrequency protection.

It shall be set according to system frequency and stability control strategy.

4. [81Ui.En]

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage i of underfrequency protection.

3.18 Distance Protection (21T) 3


3.18.1 Access Path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Protection Settings  DistProt Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Protection Settings  DistProt
Settings

3.18.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 x.21T.FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
2 x.21T.FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
3 x.21T.FD.NOC.I2_Set (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
4 x.21T.Ang_Alpha 5~30 1 °
5 x.21T.Ang_Beta 5~30 1 °
6 x.21T.LoadEnch.phi 5~50 1 °
7 x.21T.LoadEnch.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
8 x.21T.I_PSBR (0.050~40.000)×In 0.001 A
Mho
9 x.21T.ZG.Opt_Characteristic - -
Quad
Mho
10 x.21T.ZP.Opt_Characteristic - -
Quad
Forward
11 x.21Ti.DirMode Reverse - -
Non_Directional
12 x.21Ti.Real_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 -
13 x.21Ti.Imag_K0 -4.000~4.000 0.001 -
14 x.21Ti.phi1_Reach 30~89 1 °
15 x.21Ti.ZG.RCA 0~45 1 °
16 x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
17 x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
18 x.21Ti.ZG.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
19 x.21Ti.ZG.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-81


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit


20 x.21Ti.ZG.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
21 x.21Ti.ZG.En - -
Enabled
Disabled
22 x.21Ti.ZG.En_3I0 - -
Enabled
Disabled
23 x.21Ti.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
24 x.21Ti.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk - -
Enabled

3 25 x.21Ti.ZP.RCA 0~45 1 °
26 x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
27 x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
28 x.21Ti.ZP.R_Set (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
29 x.21Ti.ZP.R_Offset (0.000~4Unn)/In 0.001 Ω
30 x.21Ti.ZP.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s
Disabled
31 x.21Ti.ZP.En - -
Enabled
Disabled
32 x.21Ti.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
33 x.21Ti.LoadEnch.En - -
Enabled
Disabled
34 x.21Ti.En_PSBR - -
Enabled
Disabled
35 x.21Ti.En_ReacLine - -
Enabled

3.18.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.21T.FD.DPFC.I_Set]

It is used to set the current setting of DPFC current fault detector element.

It should be higher than the maximum variation of load current and typically 0.2In. For the lines
with heavy load fluctuation, such as electric railway, rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the
setting should be increased properly to avoid the frequent pickup of the device.

2. [x.21T.FD.ROC.3I0_Set]

It is used to set the current setting of residual current fault detector element.

It should be greater than the maximum three-phase unbalance current.

3. [x.21T.FD.NOC.I2_Set]

It is used to set the current setting of negative-sequence current fault detector element.

It should be greater than the maximum negative-sequence unbalance current.

3-82 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

4. [x.21T.Ang_Alpha]

It is used to set the angle of directional line in the second quadrant (when the setting
[x.21Ti.DirMode] is set as “Forward”) or fourth quadrant (when the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode] is
set as “Reverse”) for quadrilateral distance element.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the transformer, or for both the
transformer and the opposite bus, then the recommended setting is 15°.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the opposite bus, this setting should
be set according to the positive sequence angle of the line. If the line positive sequence angle
is large, for example, more than 80 degree, this setting should be increased accordingly,
considering the error of line parameter and measured impedance. 3
5. [x.21T.Ang_Beta]

It is used to set the angle of directional line in the fourth quadrant (when the setting
[x.21Ti.DirMode] is set as “Forward”) or second quadrant (when the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode]
is set as “Reverse”) for quadrilateral distance element.

The recommended value is 15°.

6. [x.21T.LoadEnch.phi]

It is used to set the angle setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be set according to the maximum load impedance angle (φLoad_Max).

The recommended setting principle is as below.

[21L.LoadEnch.phi] >φLoad_Max +φθ

φθ is the margin.

The recommended value is 5°.

7. [x.21T.LoadEnch.R_Set]

It is used to set resistance setting of load trapezoid characteristics.

It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load conditions.

Assume that the maximum permissive load is Smax (MVA), and corresponding minimum voltage
is Umin (kV) and then under this operation condition, the recommended setting principle is as
below:
2
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[𝑥. 21𝑇. 𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑𝐸𝑛𝑐ℎ. 𝑅_𝑆𝑒𝑡] < 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑅𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 ×
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient.

Its recommended value is 0.7.

8. [x.21T.I_PSBR]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-83


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is used to set the current setting for power swing blocking releasing

The following setting rule is recommended.

[𝑥. 21𝑇. 𝐼_𝑃𝑆𝐵𝑅] = 1.1 × 𝐼𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑_𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐼𝐿𝑜𝑎𝑑_𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum load current of the line.

9. [x.21T.ZG.Opt_Characteristic]

It is used to select the characteristics of phase-to-ground distance element.

Mho: mho characteristics

3 Quad: quadrilateral characteristics

10. [x.21T.ZP.Opt_Characteristic]

It is used to select the characteristics option of phase-to-phase distance element.

Mho: mho characteristics

Quad: quadrilateral characteristics

11. [x.21Ti.DirMode]

It is used to select direction characteristics for zone i of distance protection (i=1~4)

Forward: forward direction

Reverse: reverse direction

Non-directional: none direction

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the transformer, then the setting
[x.21Ti.DirMode] should be set as “Forward”. If the distance element is used as backup
protection for both the transformer and the opposite bus, then the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode]
should be set as “Non_Directional”. If the distance element is used as backup protection for
the opposite bus, then the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode] should set as “Reverse”.

12. [x.21Ti.Real_K0]

It is used to set the real component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone i of
distance protection (i=1~4). The calculation equation is,

Ż0L − Ż1L
[x. 21Li. Real_K0] = Real { }
3Ż1L

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the protected element respectively.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the bus, then the line parameters will
be used.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for transformer, or for both the transformer
and the opposite bus, then the transformer parameters will be used.

3-84 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

13. [x.21Ti.Imag_K0]

It is used to set the imaginary component of zero-sequence compensation coefficient for zone
i of distance protection (i=1~6). The calculation equation is,

Ż0L − Ż1L
[x. 21Li. Imag_K0] = Imag { }
3Ż1L

Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence impedance of the protected element respectively.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the bus, then the line parameters will
be used.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for transformer, or for both the transformer 3
and the opposite bus, then the transformer parameters will be used.

14. [x.21Ti.phi1_Reach]

It is used to set phase angle of positive-sequence impedance for zone i of distance protection.
(i=1~4). The calculation equation is,

X1
[x. 21Li. phi1_Reach] = tan−1 ( )
R1

X1 and R1 are positive-sequence reactance and resistance of the protected element


respectively.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the opposite bus, then the line
parameter will be used.

If the distance element is used as backup protection for the transformer, or for both the
transformer and the opposite bus, then transformer parameters will be used.

15. [x.21Ti.ZG.RCA]

It is used to set the downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone i of quadrilateral
phase-to-ground distance element. (i=1~4).

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-ground distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [x.21Ti.En_ReacLine]. And its
value is valid when the setting [x.21Ti.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered
for phase-to-ground fault. Normally, the recommended value 15°is appropriate for most cases.

16. [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set]

It is used to set the impedance setting of zone i of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho or
Quad characteristics), (i=1~4). The following setting rules are recommended for most
application scenes.

a. Distance element is used as backup protection for the transformer, or for both the
transformer and the opposite bus

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-85


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

Both conditions share the setting rules for [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set].

1) Protection area covers the most part of the transformer.

The setting rule is as follows.

[x. 21Ti. ZG. Z_Set] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × Z1T

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 KrelKrel is the reliability coefficient, normally 0.7 is recommended.

For 2-winding transformer, Z1T Z1L is the positive-sequence transformer impedance.


For 3-winding transformer, HVS side, for instance, Z1T is the sum of positive-
sequence impedance of HVS and MVS side.
3 2) Protection area covers the whole of transformer and part of the line at MVS side.

The setting rules are as follows.

i. Considering the sensitivity of fault on the bus at MVS side.

[x. 21Ti. ZG. Z_Set] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × Z1T

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 Krel is the reliability coefficient, normally 1.3 is recommended.

ii. Considering the cooperation with Zone 1(or Zone2) of line protection at MVS side

[x. 21Ti. ZG. Z_Set] = 0.7 × Z1T + 0.8 × 𝐾𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛 × 𝑍𝑑𝑧

𝐾𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum infeed coefficient under all the conditions.

𝑍𝑑𝑧 is the setting of Zone1(or Zone2) of line protection at MVS side.

Based on the above two principles, the smaller value is chosen for the setting.

b. Distance element is used as backup protection for the opposite bus

In this case, the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode] should select “Reverse”, the following setting
rules are as follows.

1) Based on the transformer impedance.

[x. 21Ti. ZG. Z_Set] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × Z1T

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 Krel is the reliability coefficient, normally 0.05-0.10 is used.

2) Considering the cooperation with Zone1 (or Zone2) of line protection at opposite
side.

[x. 21Ti. ZG. Z_Set] = 0.8 × 𝐾𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛 × 𝑍𝑑𝑧

Z dZ is the setting of Zone1(or Zone2) of line protection at HVS side.

Based on the above two principles, the smaller value is chosen for the setting.

17. [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Offset]

It is used to set the shift impedance setting of zone i of phase-to-ground distance element

3-86 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

(Mho or Quad characteristics). (i=1~4)

It is associated with the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting
[x.21Ti.DirMode] is set as "Non-directional".

The setting rule is the same as the one of [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set] when the distance element is
used only for the backup protection of the opposite bus.

18. [x.21Ti.ZG.R_Set]

It is used to set the resistance setting of zone i of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance


element. (i=1~4)

If this setting is too large compared with [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen. 3
Thus, the following setting rule is recommended,

[x.21Ti.ZG.R_Set]≤4×[x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set]

19. [x.21Ti.ZG.R_Offset]

It is used to set the shift resistance setting of zone i of quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance
element. (i=1~4)

There are two main usages for this setting.

 For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the
unwanted area in second quadrant.

 For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.

Please set this setting according to the application condition.

20. [x.21Ti.ZG.t_Op]

It is used to set the time delay of zone i of phase-to-ground distance element (Mho or Quad
characteristics, i=1~4).

When the distance element does not cooperate with the line distance protection, the setting
[x.21Ti.ZG.t_Op] is recommended as 0.5s. Otherwise, [x.21Ti.ZG.t_Op] should be greater than
the time delay of the corresponding distance element by 0.5s.

21. [x.21Ti.ZG.En]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to-ground distance element. (Mho or Quad


characteristics, i=1~4)

22. [x.21Ti.ZG.En_3I0]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to-ground distance element controlled by residual


current fault detector element. (Mho or Quad characteristics, i=1~4)

Phase-to-ground distance element will be controlled by the signal "x.21T.FD.ROC_Pkp" if the


setting is set as "Enabled".

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-87


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

This setting is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.

23. [x.21Ti.ZG.En_NeuDir_Blk]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction


control element of earth fault protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics , i=1~4)

This setting is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.

24. [x.21Ti.ZG.En_NegDir_Blk]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to-ground distance element blocked by direction


control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics ,
3 i=1~4)

This setting is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.

25. [x.21Ti.ZP.RCA]

It is used to set the downward offset angle of the reactance line for zone i of quadrilateral
phase-to-phase distance element. (i=1~4).

The setting is used to prevent phase-to-phase distance element from overreaching during the
fault with resistance. The setting is associated with the setting [x.21Ti.En_ReacLine]. And its
value is valid when the setting [x.21Ti.En_ReacLine] is set as "Enabled".

The setting is recommended to be set according to the maximum fault resistance considered
for phase-to-phase fault. Normally, the recommend value 15°is appropriate for most cases.

26. [x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Set]

It is used to set the impedance setting of zone i of phase-to-phase distance element (Mho or
Quad characteristics). (i=1~4). This setting follows the same rules of [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Set].

27. [x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Offset]

It is used to set the shift impedance setting of zone i of phase-to-phase distance element (Mho
or Quad characteristics). (i=1~4)

It is associated with the setting [x.21Ti.DirMode]. It is valid when the direction setting
[x.21Ti.DirMode] is set as "Non-directional".

This setting follows the same rules of [x.21Ti.ZG.Z_Offset].

28. [x.21Ti.ZP.R_Set]

It is used to set the resistance setting of zone i of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance


element. (i=1~4)

If this setting is too large compared with [x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Set], then overreach is likely to happen.
Thus, the following setting rule is recommended.

[x.21Ti.ZP.R_Set]≤4×[x.21Ti.ZP.Z_Set]

29. [x.21Ti.ZP.R_Offset]

3-88 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

It is used to set the shift resistance setting of zone i of quadrilateral phase-to-phase distance
element. (i=1~4)

There are two main usages for this setting.

 For the Quad characteristic distance protection with direction, it is used to cut off the
unwanted area in second quadrant.

 For the Quad characteristic distance protection without direction, it is used for the offset
boundary of the operation area.

Please set this setting according to the application condition.

30. [x.21Ti.ZP.t_Op] 3
It is used to set the time delay of zone i of phase-to-phase distance element (Mho or Quad
characteristics, i=1~4)

When the distance element does not cooperate with the line distance protection, then
[x.21Ti.ZP.t_Op] is recommended as 0.5s. Otherwise, [x.21Ti.ZP.t_Op] should be greater than
the time delay of the corresponding distance element by 0.5s.

31. [x.21Ti.ZP.En]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to-phase distance element. (Mho or Quad


characteristics, i=1~4)

32. [x.21Ti.ZP.En_NegDir_Blk]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of phase-to- phase distance element blocked by direction


control element of negative-sequence overcurrent protection. (Mho or Quad characteristics,
i=1~4)

This setting is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.

33. [x.21Ti.LoadEnch.En]

It is used to enable/disable load trapezoid characteristics for zone i of distance protection. (Mho
or Quad characteristics, i=1~4)

34. [x.21Ti.En_PSBR]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of distance protection controlled by PSBR. (Mho or Quad


characteristics, i=1~4)

When the setting is set as "Enabled", the power swing blocking for distance protection will be
released if the corresponding conditions are satisfied.

35. [x.21Ti.En_ReacLine]

It is used to enable/disable zone i of distance protection controlled by the reactance line (Mho
or Quad characteristics, i=1~4).

The relevant setting are [x.21Ti.ZG.RCA] and [x.21Ti.ZP.RCA].

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3-89


Date: February 5, 2021
3 Protection Settings

3-90 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4 Control Settings

Table of Contents

4.1 Synchronism Check Settings ......................................................................... 4-1


4.1.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................4-2

4.2 Voltage Selection ............................................................................................. 4-4


4.2.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................4-4
4
4.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................4-4

4.3 Double Point Status Settings ......................................................................... 4-4


4.3.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................4-4

4.3.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................4-4

4.3.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................4-4

4.4 Control Settings ............................................................................................... 4-5


4.4.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................4-5

4.4.2 Setting list ...........................................................................................................................4-5

4.4.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................4-5

4.5 Tap Position Indicator Settings ...................................................................... 4-6


4.5.1 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................4-6

4.5.2 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................4-7

4.6 Interlocking Logic Settings........................................................................... 4-11


4.6.1 Access path ...................................................................................................................... 4-11

4.6.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................ 4-11

4.6.3 Setting Principle ................................................................................................................ 4-11

4.7 Automatic Tap Changer Control Settings .................................................... 4-12


4.7.1 Access path ......................................................................................................................4-12

4.7.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................4-12

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-a


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4.7.3 Setting Principle ................................................................................................................4-13

4.8 Parallel Voltage Regulation Settings............................................................ 4-14


4.8.1 Access path ......................................................................................................................4-14

4.8.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................4-14

4.8.3 Setting Principle ................................................................................................................4-15

List of Figures

Figure 4.5-1 Diagram of conversion from DC analog input to TPI ................................... 4-10

4-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear.

4.1 Synchronism Check Settings


Settings for different circuit breakers (CB**) and multiple setting groups may be available. Their
values in each group are set independently.

4.1.1 Access path


Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Syn Settings
PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Group*  Meas Control Settings  Syn
Settings
4
4.1.2 Setting List
No. Setting Range Step Unit
1 25.Opt_ValidMode Setting or Config - -
2 25.En_SynChk Disabled or Enabled - -
3 25.En_DdChk Disabled or Enabled - -
4 25.U_UV 0.00~100.00 0.01 %
5 25.U_OV 100.00~170.00 0.01 %
6 25.f_UF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
7 25.f_OF 45.000~65.000 0.001 Hz
8 25.Opt_U_SynChk Ua, Ub, Uc, Uab, Ubc, Uca - -
9 25.U_Diff_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
10 25.f_Diff_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz
11 25.df/dt_Set 0.00~2.00 0.01 Hz/s
12 25.phi_Diff_Set 0.00~180.00 0.01 °
13 25.phi_Comp 0.00~360.00 0.01 °
SynDdRefDd
SynLvRefDd
SynDdRefLv
14 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk RefDd - -
SynDd
SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv
AnySideDd
15 25.U_DdChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
16 25.U_LvChk 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
17 25.t_Reset 0~60 1 s
18 25.t_Close_CB 0~2000 1 ms
19 25.En_f_Diff_Chk Disabled or Enabled - -
20 25.En_df/dt_Chk Disabled or Enabled - -

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-1


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4.1.3 Setting Guidelines


1. [25.Opt_ValidMode]
The option of the decision mode of synchronism check
 "Setting": the mode depends on the setting values of [CB**.25.En_SynChk] and
[CB**.25.En_DdChk];
 "Config": the mode depends on the input signal values of "in_syn_chk" and "in_vol_chk" in
the functional bloc via the configuration tool PCS-Studio.
2. [25.En_SynChk]
Enabling/Disabling the synchro-check mode (valid when [CB**.25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting)
3. [25.En_DdChk]
Enabling/Disabling the dead charge check mode (valid when [CB**.25.Opt_ValidMode] =
Setting)
4. [25.U_UV]
4 The lower voltage limit (in percentage) of voltage to block CB synchronous closing
Recommended value: 80.00% Un
5. [25.U_OV]
The upper limit (in percentage) of voltage to block CB synchronous closing
Recommended value: 170.00% Un
6. [25.f_UF]
The lower limit of frequency to block CB synchronous closing
Recommended value: 45.000 Hz
7. [25.f_OF]
The upper limit of frequency to block CB synchronous closing
Recommended value: 65.000 Hz
8. [25.Opt_U_SynChk]
The option of single-phase or phase-phase voltage in synchronism check (valid when the
synchronization side or the reference side voltage is three-phase)
9. [25.U_Diff_Set]
The threshold of voltage difference in synchro-check
Recommended value: 10.00 V
10. [25.f_Diff_Set]
The threshold of frequency difference in synchro-check
Recommended value: 0.50 Hz
11. [25.df/dt_Set]
The threshold of frequency variation in synchro-check
Recommended value: 1.00 Hz/s
12. [25.phi_Diff_Set]
The threshold of phase difference in synchro-check
Recommended value: 15.00 degree
13. [25.phi_Comp]

4-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

The compensation angle of phase difference in synchro-check


14. [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk]
The option of the dead charge check mode

Setting Value Dead charge check mode

SynDdRefDd Dead check for both the reference and the synchronous sides

Live check for synchronous side and dead check for reference
SynLvRefDd
side

Dead check for synchronous side and live check for reference
SynDdRefLv
side

RefDd Dead check for reference side

SynDd Dead check for synchronous side

SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv Option 2 or 3
4
AnySideDd Option 1, 2 or 3

15. [25.U_DdChk]
The threshold of dead voltage in dead charge check
Recommended value: 17.32 V
16. [25.U_LvChk]
The threshold of live voltage in dead charge check
Recommended value: 34.64 V
17. [25.t_Reset]
The time window to check the synchronous closing criteria
The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when
all synchronous closing criteria are met or timeout. The timeout causes the synchronism check
failure.
Recommended value: 5 seconds
18. [25.t_Close_CB]
The time window to check the CB closing operation
The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when
CB status changes to be closing.
Set according to the CB mechanism operating time.
Recommended value: 20 ms
19. [25.En_f_Diff_Chk]
Enabling/Disabling the frequency difference check
20. [25.En_df/dt_Chk]
Enabling/Disabling the frequency variation difference check

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-3


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4.2 Voltage Selection

4.2.1 Access path


Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  System Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global Global Settings  System
Settings

4.2.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Step Unit

NoVoltSel, DblBusOneCB, one-and-halfBusCB, one-and-


1 x.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig - -
halfTieCB

4.2.3 Setting Guidelines


4
1. [x.VoltSel.Opt_CBConfig]
The option of CB application scenario for voltage selection
Set according to the CB arrangement. When “NoVoltSel” is selected, the voltage selection logic
is disabled.

4.3 Double Point Status Settings


4.3.1 Access path
Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  DPS Settings
PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  DPS
Settings

4.3.2 Setting List


No. Setting Range Steps Unit
1 CB**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms
2 CB**.DPS.En_Alm Disabled Enabled - -
3 CB**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms
4 DS**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms
5 DS**.DPS.En_Alm Disabled Enabled - -
6 DS**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms

4.3.3 Setting Guidelines


1. [CB**.DPS.t_DPU]
The Delay PickUp (DPU) time, i.e. debounce time, of CB DPS
The setting value should be greater than the CB operating time to avoid the intermediate state
in the process of CB opening or closing.
Recommended value: 500ms
2. [CB**.DPS.En_Alm]

4-4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

Enabling/Disabling alarm when CB DPS_BAD or DPS_INT appears


3. [CB**.DPS.t_Alm]
Time delay of CB DPS alarm
Recommended value: 500ms
4. [DS**.DPS.t_DPU]
Delay PickUp (DPU) time, i.e. debounce time, of DS DPS
The setting value should be greater than the DS operating time to avoid the intermediate state
in the process of DS opening or closing.
Recommended value: 500ms
5. [DS**.DPS.En_Alm]
Enabling/Disabling alarm when DS DPS_BAD or DPS_INT appears
6. [DS**.DPS.t_Alm]
Time delay of DS DPS alarm
Recommended value: 500ms 4
4.4 Control Settings
Settings for different circuit breakers (CB**), disconnectors (DS**) and direct control objects
(DirCtrl**) may be available.

4.4.1 Access path


Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Control Settings
PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings 
Control Settings

4.4.2 Setting list


No. Setting Range Step Unit
1 CB**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
2 CB**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
3 DS**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
4 DS**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
5 DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms
6 DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

4.4.3 Setting Guidelines


1. [CB**.t_PW_Opn]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of CB opening output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB opening circuit.
Recommended value: 500 ms
2. [CB**.t_PW_Cls]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of CB closing output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB closing circuit.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-5


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

Recommended value: 500 ms


3. [DS**.t_PW_Opn]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of DS opening output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS opening circuit.
Recommended value: 500 ms
4. [DS**.t_PW_Cls]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of DS closing output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS closing circuit.
Recommended value: 500 ms
5. [DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of direct control opening output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control opening circuit.

4 Recommended value: 500 ms


6. [DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of direct control closing output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control closing circuit.
Recommended value: 500 ms.

4.5 Tap Position Indicator Settings


4.5.1 Setting List
Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  TP Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  TP
Settings

No. Setting Range Step Unit

Resv,
BCD,
Carry,
1 84.Opt_Code - -
Independent,
BCD-PhSeg,
Independent-PhSeg

2 84.t_DPU 0~6000 1 ms

3 84.En_RunawayTrip Disabled or Enabled - -

4 84.t_RunawayTrip 0~6000 1 ms

5 84.Num_AI_Segment 0~48 1 -

6 84.Rated_AI_Segment** -220.00~220.00 0.01 -

7 84.Devn_AI_Segment** 0.00~100.00 0.01 %

4-6 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

No. Setting Range Step Unit

8 84.Value_Segment** -50~50 1 -

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Control Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings 
Control Settings

No. Setting Range Step Unit

1 84CSWI1.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

2 84CSWI1.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

3 84CSWI2.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

4 84CSWI2.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms
4
Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Interlock Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings 
Interlock Settings

No. Setting Range Step Unit

1 84CSWI1.En_CILO_Opn Disabled or Enabled - -

2 84CSWI1.En_CILO_Cls Disabled or Enabled - -

3 84CSWI2.En_CILO_Opn Disabled or Enabled - -

4 84CSWI2.En_CILO_Cls Disabled or Enabled - -

4.5.2 Setting Guidelines


1. [84.Opt_Code]
The option of tap position indication (TPI) input code
 Resv: input direct or DC analogue channel
 BCD: 6-bit BCD for max. 39 positions
Max. 39 positions, Example: 17 = 01 0111 (BI_06 -> BI_01)
Validation condition (AND):
The lower 4 bits represent a decimal number which is smaller than 9;
At least one of the 6 bits appear to be 1.

No. Input Signal Description

1 84.in_tap01

2 84.in_tap02 Decimal number 0~9 of units

3 84.in_tap03

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-7


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

No. Input Signal Description

4 84.in_tap04

5 84.in_tap05
Decimal number 0~3 of tens
6 84.in_tap06

 Carry: 13-bit carry inputs for max. 29 positions


Max. 29 positions, Example: 17 = 011 0001 0000 00 (BI_13 -> BI_01)
Validation condition (AND):
Only one of the higher 3 bits, which represent units, tens and twenties, appear to be 1;
Only one of the lower 10 bits, which represent decimal numbers, appear to be 1.

No. Input Signal Description

4 1 84.in_tap**
**: 01~10
Decimal number 0~9 of units

Validation for decimal number of units


2 84.in_tap11 1: valid
0: invalid

Validation for decimal number of tens


3 84.in_tap12 1: valid
0: invalid

Validation for decimal number of twenties


4 84.in_tap13 1: valid
0: invalid

 Independent: 26-bit independent contacts for max. 26 positions


Max. 26 positions, Example: 17 = 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 00 (BI_26 -> BI_01)
Validation condition:
Only one of the 26 bits appear to be 1.

No. Input Signal Description

**: 01~26
1 84.in_tap** Decimal number 1~26
If all inputs are "0", they represent the decimal number 0

 BCD-PhSeq: 18-bit BCD for max. 39 phase-segregated positions


Max. 39 positions, Example: 17 = 01 0111 (BI_06 -> BI_01 and BI_12 -> BI_07 and
BI_18 -> BI_13)
Validation condition (AND, for each phase):
The lower 4 bits represent a decimal number which is smaller than 9;
At least one of the 6 bits appear to be 1.

4-8 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

Input Signal
No. Description
Phase A Phase B Phase C

1 84.in_tap01 84.in_tap07 84.in_tap13

2 84.in_tap02 84.in_tap08 84.in_tap14


Decimal number 0~9 of units
1 84.in_tap03 84.in_tap09 84.in_tap15

2 84.in_tap04 84.in_tap10 84.in_tap16

3 84.in_tap05 84.in_tap11 84.in_tap17


Decimal number 0~3 of tens
4 84.in_tap06 84.in_tap12 84.in_tap18

 Independent-PhSeq: 24-bit independent contacts for max. 8 phase-segregated


positions
Max. 8 positions, Example: 7 = 0100 0000 (BI_08 -> BI_01 and BI_16 -> BI_09 and
BI_24 -> BI_17)
4
Validation condition (for each phase):
Only one of the 8 bits appear to be 1.

No. Input Signal Description

Phase A decimal number 1~8


1 84.in_tap** **: 01~08
If all inputs are "0", they represent the decimal number 0

Phase B decimal number 1~8


2 84.in_tap** **: 09~16
If all inputs are "0", they represent the decimal number 0

Phase C decimal number 1~8


3 84.in_tap** **: 17~24
If all inputs are "0", they represent the decimal number 0

2. [84.t_DPU]
Delay PickUp (DPU) time, i.e. debounce time of TPI
The setting value should be greater than the operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of tap change.
Recommended value: 500ms
3. [84.En_RunawayTrip]
Enabling/Disabling the trip of tap changer motor power supply during the situation "Tap
runaway"
4. [84.t_RunawayTrip]
The holding time of output signal for the trip of tap changer motor power supply during the
situation "Tap runaway"
Recommended value: 500ms
5. [84.Num_AI_Segment]
The number of the defined segments, i.e. tap positions, in the DC analog input range of TPI.
For the DC analog input mode [84.Opt_Code] = Resv, the indicator adopts a channel of DCAI
module as the input. By parameterization, the DC analog input range could be defined into

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-9


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

several step segments which correspond to different tap positions. Thus, the input is converted
into three-phase tap position indication.
TPI

DCAI
R-Δ R R+Δ

Figure 4.5-1 Diagram of conversion from DC analog input to TPI


In the above diagram of conversion, take the second segment as an example:
R is [84.Rated_AI_Segment02] that defines the rated value of DC analog input in segment No.2.
4 Δ is [84.Devn_AI_Segment02] that defines the corresponding deviation.
The [84.Value_Segment02] = 9 is set to indicate that an input within this second segment, which
is defined in the range (R-Δ, R+Δ), represents the tap position 9.
Similarly, the first segment is defined to present TPI 3 and the third segment is defined to
present TPI 5.
Beside, [84.Num_AI_Segment] should be defined to involve the maximum number of possible
tap position indication.
6. [84.Rated_AI_Segment**]
Rated value corresponding to the No.** segment in DC analog input range of TPI
7. [84.Devn_AI_Segment**]
Rated value deviation corresponding to the No.** segment in DC analog input range of TPI
8. [84.Value_Segment**]
TPI number of the No.** segment in DC analog input range
Set according to the correspondence between the TPI number and the segment.
9. [84CSWI1.t_PW_Opn]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of tap changer descending output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the tap changer descending circuit.
Recommended value: 500ms
10. [84CSWI1.t_PW_Cls]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of tap changer raising output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the tap changer rasising circuit.
Recommended value: 500ms
11. [84CSWI2.t_PW_Opn]
Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of tap changer emergency stop output
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the tap changer emergency stop
circuit.
Recommended value: 500ms

4-10 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

12. [84CSWI2.t_PW_Cls]
Reserved
13. [84CSWI1.En_CILO_Opn]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of tap changer descending output
14. [84CSWI1.En_CILO_Cls]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of tap changer raising output
15. [84CSWI2.En_CILO_Opn]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of tap changer emergency stop output
16. [84CSWI2.En_CILO_Cls]
Reserved

4.6 Interlocking Logic Settings


4.6.1 Access path
4
Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Interlock Settings
PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings 
Interlock Settings

4.6.2 Setting List


No. Setting Range Steps Unit
1 CB**.En_CILO_Opn Disabled Enabled - -
2 CB**.En_CILO_Cls Disabled Enabled - -
3 DS**.En_CILO_Opn Disabled Enabled - -
4 DS**.En_CILO_Cls Disabled Enabled - -
5 DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn Disabled Enabled - -
6 DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls Disabled Enabled - -

4.6.3 Setting Principle

1. [CB**.En_CILO_Opn]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of CB opening output
2. [CB**.En_CILO_Cls]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of CB closing output
3. [DS**.En_CILO_Opn]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of DS opening output
4. [DS**.En_CILO_Cls]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of DS closing output
5. [DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of direct control opening output
6. [DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls]
Enabling/Disabling interlocking logic control of direct control closing output

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-11


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4.7 Automatic Tap Changer Control Settings

4.7.1 Access path


Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  ATCC Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  ATCC
Settings

4.7.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Steps Unit


1 90V.U_Target_1 0.00~160.00 0.01 V
2 90V.U_Target_2 0.00~160.00 0.01 V
3 90V.U_Target_3 0.00~160.00 0.01 V

4 4 90V.U_Target_4 0.00~160.00 0.01 V


5 90V.U_Bandwidth 0.10~30.00 0.01 %

Ua
Ub
Uc
6 90V.Opt_U - -
Uab
Ubc
Uca
7 90V.TP_Max 0~64 1 -
8 90V.TP_Min 0~64 1 -
9 90V.U_UV 0.00~150.00 0.01 V

Disabled
10 90V.En_Alm_UV - -
Enabled
Disabled
11 90V.En_UV_Blk - -
Enabled
12 90V.U_OV 0.00~150.00 0.01 V

Disabled
13 90V.En_Alm_OV - -
Enabled
Disabled
14 90V.En_OV_Blk - -
Enabled
15 90V.I_OC 0.00~100.00 0.01 A

Disabled
16 90V.En_Alm_OC - -
Enabled
Disabled
17 90V.En_OC_Blk - -
Enabled
Disabled
18 90V.En_IDMT - -
Enabled
19 90V.t1_Intvl 0~600 1 s

4-12 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

No. Setting Range Steps Unit


20 90V.t2_Intvl 0~600 1 s

Disabled
21 90V.En_LDCRX - -
Enabled
22 90V.X_LDC -100.00~100.00 0.01 ohm
23 90V.R_LDC 0~100.00 0.01 ohm
24 90V.t_ReguFail 0~3600 1 s
25 90V.Num_Regu 1~1000 1 -
26 90V.t_Period_Regu 1~24 1 h

4.7.3 Setting Principle

1. [90V.U_Target_1], [90V.U_Target_2], [90V.U_Target_3], [90V.U_Target_4]


ATCC target voltage values (secondary value)
2. [90V.U_Bandwidth] 4
Permissive bandwidth of ATCC target voltage
The ATCC process shall be initiated when the regulated voltage is out of the bandwidth.
3. [90V.Opt_U]
Phase option of target voltage
4. [90V.TP_Max]
Upper limit of regulatable tap position of ATCC
5. [90V.TP_Min]
Lower limit of regulatable tap position of ATCC
6. [90V.U_UV]
Threshold of ATCC undervoltage supervision
7. [90V.En_Alm_UV]
Enabling/Disabling the alarm function by ATCC undervoltage
8. [90V.En_UV_Blk]
Enabling/Disabling the blocking function by ATCC undervoltage
9. [90V.U_OV]
Threshold of ATCC overvoltage
10. [90V.En_Alm_OV]
Enabling/Disabling the alarm function by ATCC overvoltage
11. [90V.En_OV_Blk]
Enabling/Disabling the blocking function by ATCC overvoltage
12. [90V.I_OC]
Threshold of ATCC overcurrent
13. [90V.En_Alm_OC]
Enabling/Disabling the alarm function by ATCC overcurrent
14. [90V.En_OC_Blk]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-13


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

Enabling/Disabling the blocking function by ATCC overcurrent


15. [90V.En_IDMT]
Enabling/Disabling the inverse-time characteristic of ATCC initial command
16. [90V.t1_Intvl]
Time delay 1 of ATCC operation
Recommended value: 30 seconds
17. [90V.t2_Intvl]
Time delay 2 of ATCC operation
Recommended value: 10 seconds
18. [90V.En_LDCRX]
Enabling/Disabling the line voltage drop compensation function of ATCC
19. [90V.X_LDC, 90V.R_LDC]

4 Line reactance and resistance of line voltage drop compensation of ATCC


The setting value is converted according to the secondary values.
Ratio_CT
𝑋𝑆𝑒𝑐 = 𝑋𝑃𝑟𝑖 ×
Ratio_VT
20. [90V.t_ReguFail]
Judging period of ATCC failure
Recommended value: 180 seconds
21. [90V.Num_Regu]
Limit of regulation number of times in an ATCC process
22. [90V.t_Period_Regu]
Regulation period of an ATCC process
Recommended value: 24 hours

4.8 Parallel Voltage Regulation Settings

4.8.1 Access path


Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  PVR Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  PVR
Settings

4.8.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Steps Unit


1 PVR.t_Wait 0~60 1 s
2 PVR.t_Stable 0~60 1 s
3 PVR.t_UnmatchedTP 0~30 1 s
Forward
4 PVR.Opt_Dir_TP - -
Reverse

4-14 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
4 Control Settings

4.8.3 Setting Principle

1. [PVR.t_Wait]
Waiting time of tap changer operation of PVR
Recommended value: 60 seconds
2. [PVR.t_Stable]
Waiting time of stable state of PVR
Recommended value: 60 seconds
3. [PVR.t_UnmatchedTP]
Debounce time of TPI consistency judgement of PVR
Recommended value: 10 seconds
4. [PVR.Opt_Dir_TP]
Option of tap change sequence of PVR
4

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 4-15


Date: February 5, 2021
5 Measurement Settings

5 Measurement Settings

Table of Contents

5.1 Function Settings ............................................................................................ 5-1


5.1.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................5-1

5.1.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................5-1

5.2 DC Measuring Transducers Settings ............................................................. 5-2


5.2.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................5-2

5.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................5-2

5.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................5-2

5.3 Energy Metering Settings ............................................................................... 5-3 5


5.3.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................5-3

5.3.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................5-3

5.3.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................5-3

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 5-a


Date: February 5, 2021
5 Measurement Settings

5-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
5 Measurement Settings

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear.

5.1 Function Settings


5.1.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Function Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings 
Function Settings

5.1.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Step Unit


1 x.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
5
2 25.Ref.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
3 25.Syn.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %
4 B**.ZeroDrift 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

5.1.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.ZeroDrift_PQ]

The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated power) of the calculated active and
reactive power

Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a calculated value that is less than this
setting will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Recommended value: 0.50%

2. [25.Ref.ZeroDrift_U], [25.Syn.ZeroDrift_U]

The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated voltage) of voltage sampling.

Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value that is less than this
setting will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Recommended value: 0.20%

3. [B**.ZeroDrift]

The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the upper limit of the DC input range, i.e. 20mA or
10V) of the DC analogue sampling by the DCAI module in the No.xx slot

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 5-1


Date: February 5, 2021
5 Measurement Settings

Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value less than this setting will
be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.

Recommended value: 0.20%

5.2 DC Measuring Transducers Settings


Settings for different DC analogue input modules (B**) may be available

5.2.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings DCAI Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  DCAI
Settings

5.2.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Step Unit


0~10V
1 B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer** - -
0~20mA

5 2 B**.DCAI.Min_Transducer** -60000.000~60000.000 0.001 -


3 B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer** -60000.000~60000.000 0.001 -

5.2.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [B**.DCAI.Opt_Type_Transducer**]

The option of DC analogue input type

Set according to transducer type.

2. [B**.DCAI.Min_Transducer**], [B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer**]

The lower and the upper limits of the DC analogue input range corresponding to the original
physical quantity.

A DC measuring transducer input typically converts a value which represents a physical


quantity such as temperature or pressure. Therefore, a characteristic curve that assigns the
physical quantity to the DC analogue value is necessary. The following figure shows an
example.

5-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
5 Measurement Settings

Temperature (⁰C)

Tmax

P
Tmin Tp
ITransd (mA)

ip 20
O

Figure 5.2-1 Characteristic curve of a DC measuring transducer input

In this example, the setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0mA to
+20mA. The measured value 0mA means a temperature of Tmin which is defined by the setting
[B**.DCAI.Min_Transducer**] and the measured value 20mA signifies a temperature of Tmax which 5
is defined by the setting [B**.DCAI.Max_Transducer**]. Thus, for the actual point P, the measured
transducer current ip can be converted into a value of temperature.

5.3 Energy Metering Settings


5.3.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Meas Control Settings  Energy Metering Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Meas Control Settings  Energy
Metering Settings

5.3.2 Setting List

No. Setting Range Step Unit


1 x.MMTR.U2n 0.00~200.00 0.01 V
2 x.MMTR.I2n 1 or 5 - A

5.3.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.MMTR.U2n]

The secondary rated voltage of metering.

2. [x.MMTR.I2n]

The secondary rated current of metering.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 5-3


Date: February 5, 2021
6 Supervision Settings

6 Supervision Settings

Table of Contents

6.1 Supervision Settings ....................................................................................... 6-1


6.1.1 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.2 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................6-1

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 6-a


Date: February 5, 2021
6 Supervision Settings

6-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
6 Supervision Settings

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear.

6.1 Supervision Settings


6.1.1 Setting List

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings Global Settings  System Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node → IED Node → Setting  Global  Global Settings  System
Settings

No. Setting Range Step Unit


Disabled
1 x.En_VT - -
Enabled

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Superv Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Global Settings  Superv
Settings 6
No. Name Range Step Unit
Disabled
1 x.VTS.En - -
Enabled
Bus
2 x.VTS.Opt_VT - -
Bay
3 x.VTS.t_DPU 0.200~30.000 0.001 s
4 x.VTS.t_DDO 0.200~30.000 0.001 s
5 x.VTS.U1_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
6 x.VTS.3U0_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
7 x.VTS.U2_Set 0.00~100.00 0.01 V
Disabled
8 En_AutoRecov_Alm_CTS - -
Enabled

6.1.2 Setting Guidelines

1. [x.En_VT]

Enabling/Disabling the voltage sampling by instrument transformer

2. [x.VTS.En]

Enabling/Disabling the alarm function of VT circuit supervision

3. [x.VTS.Opt_VT]

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 6-1


Date: February 5, 2021
6 Supervision Settings

The option of VT for busbar or bay

4. [x.VTS.t_DPU]

The Delay PickUp (DPU) time of alarm of VT circuit supervision

Recommended value: 1.25 second

5. [x.VTS.t_DDO]

The Delay DropOut (DDO) time of alarm of VT circuit supervision

Recommended value: 10 second

6. [x.VTS.U1_Set]

Threshold of positive-sequence voltage of VT circuit supervision

Recommended value: 30 V

7. [x.VTS.3U0_Set]

The threshold of calculated residual voltage of VT circuit supervision

Recommended value: 8 V

8. [x.VTS.U2_Set]

The threshold of negative sequence voltage of VT circuit supervision


6 Recommended value: 8 V

9. [En_AutoRecov_Alm_CTS]

This logic setting is to enable or disable resetting the CT circuit failure alarm signal
automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.

If the setting is set as “Enabled”, the alarm of CT circuit failure will be reset automatically after
the failure is cleared, if the setting is set as “Disabled”, the alarm will be reset manually.

6-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

7 Communication Settings

Table of Contents

7.1 General Communication Settings .................................................................. 7-1


7.1.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................7-2

7.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings ............................................................... 7-7


7.2.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................7-7

7.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................7-7

7.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................7-7

7.3 DNP Communication Settings ...................................................................... 7-10


7.3.1 Access path ......................................................................................................................7-10

7.3.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................7-10

7.3.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................7-14

7.4 IEC103 Communication Settings ................................................................. 7-22


7.4.1 Access path ......................................................................................................................7-22 7
7.4.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................7-22

7.4.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................7-22

7.5 Modbus Communication Settings ................................................................ 7-24


7.5.1 Access path: .....................................................................................................................7-24

7.5.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................7-25

7.5.3 Setting Guidelines ............................................................................................................7-25

7.6 SV Communication Settings ......................................................................... 7-25


7.6.1 Access path ......................................................................................................................7-25

7.6.2 Setting List ........................................................................................................................7-25

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-a


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

7-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

7.1 General Communication Settings


7.1.1 Access path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  General Comm
Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Comm Settings  General
Comm Settings

7.1.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


1 IP_LAN1 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
2 Mask_LAN1 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
3 IP_LAN2 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
4 Mask_LAN2 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
5 IP_LAN3 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
6 Mask_LAN3 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
7 IP_LAN4 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
8 Mask_LAN4 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
Disabled -
9 En_LAN1 -
Enabled
Disabled -
10 En_LAN2 -
Enabled
Disabled -
11 En_LAN3 -
Enabled
Disabled -
7
12 En_LAN4 -
Enabled
Normal -
1-2:Normal, 3-4:HSR
13 B01.Opt_NetMode -
1-2:Normal, 3-4:PRP
1-2:Normal, 3-4:RSTP
Normal -
14 B02.Grp01.Opt_NetMode HSR -
PRP
Normal -
15 B02.Grp02.Opt_NetMode HSR -
PRP
4800 -
9600
19200
16 Baud_Printer bps
38400
57600
115200

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-1


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Disabled -
17 En_AutoPrint -
Enabled
IEC103 -
18 Protocol_RS485-1 -
Modbus
IEC103 -
19 Protocol_RS485-2 -
Modbus
4800 -
9600
19200
20 Baud_RS485-1 bps
38400
57600
115200
4800 -
9600
19200
21 Baud_RS485-2 bps
38400
57600
115200
22 Addr_RS485-1 0~255 1 -
23 Addr_RS485-2 0~255 1 -
24 Gateway 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
25 Cfg_NetPorts_Bond 0~255 1 -
26 IP_SyslogServer01 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
27 IP_SyslogServer02 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
7 28 IP_SyslogServer03 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
29 IP_SyslogServer04 0.0.0.0~ 255.255.255.255 - -
Disabled -
30 En_IP_Whitelist -
Enabled
31 IP**_Whitelist 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -

7.1.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [IP_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the IP address of No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [Mask_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the subnet mask of No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.

7-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be


configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. [En_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to enable/disable No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.

If No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module is required to be used, please configure this setting
as “Enabled”. Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. [B01.Opt_NetMode]

It is designed to configure the networking method of the CPU module located in No.1 slot.

4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table. Please configure this
setting according to actual requirements.

Table 7.1-1 Setting value options of [B01.Opt_NetMode]

No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected, all the No.1 ~ No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module

1 Normal adopt “Normal” mode.

In the “Normal” mode, there is no data redundancy mechanism.

If this option is selected:


7
No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.

No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “HSR” (IEC 62439-3 High-
availability Seamless Redundancy) mode to realize data redundancy.

2 1-2:Normal, 3-4:HSR In the “HSR” mode, the principle of parallel operation to a single ring is applied to
realize data redundancy. For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one
through each port. Both the 2 frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring.
Every node forwards the frames it receives from one port to another to reach the
next node. When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent, the sender
node discards the frame to avoid loops.

If this option is selected:

No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.
3 1-2:Normal, 3-4:PRP
No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “PRP” (IEC 62439-3
Parallel Redundancy Protocol) mode to realize data redundancy.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-3


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description


In the “PRP” mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the communication
is performed in parallel, i.e.: the same data package is transmitted on both
channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is
compared with data package identity from the other channel. If they are the same,
the last package will be discarded.

If this option is selected:

No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.

No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “RSTP” (Rapid Spanning
4 1-2:Normal, 3-4:RSTP Tree Protocol) mode.

In the “RSTP” mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: RSTP serves for
the reorganization of the network structure in case of network path error. In other
words, RSTP reroutes the data to another path after the failure of a network path.

5. [B02.Grp01.Opt_NetMode]

It is designed to configure the network method of the 1st group interface of the NET-DSP
module NR6113 located in slot No.2.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements, and it should be consistent with
the networking method of the CPU module located in No.1 slot.

6. [B02.Grp02.Opt_NetMode]

It is designed to configure the network method of the 2nd group interface of the NET-DSP
7 module NR6113 located in slot No.2.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements, and it should be consistent with
the networking method of the CPU module located in No.1 slot.

7. [Baud_Printer]

It is designed to configure the baud rate of the print port.

Value of this setting must be the same as the baud rate of the printer that is connected to this
device.

8. [En_AutoPrint]

It is designed to enable/disable automatic printing function.

If automatic printing function is required when printing events (e.g.: disturbance records,
supervision events, IO events, etc.) are generated, please configured this setting as “Enabled”.
Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

9. [Protocol_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)

It is designed to configure the communication protocol of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear

7-4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

side of this device.

2 setting value options are available:

IEC103: IEC60870-5-103 protocol

Modbus: Modbus protocol

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).

10. [Baud_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)

It is designed to configure the communication baud rate of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear
side of this device.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).

11. [Addr_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)

It is designed to configure the communication address of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear
side of this device.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).

12. [Gateway]

It is designed to configure the IP address of the gateway. If there is no gateway, please


configure this setting as “0.0.0.0”.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.


7
13. [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond]

It is designed to configure the Ethernet ports that are used as hot standby each other.

The setting is used to configure dual-networks switching, and it means that no dual-networks
switching is created when the setting is set as “0”. The device support a bond between any
two Ethernet ports, and the bond among three or above Ethernet ports is impermissible.

The devices communicate with SAS by station level network. In order to ensure reliable
communication, dual networks (i.e., network 1 and network 2) are adopted. Another special
communication mode based on dual networks is that Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of
the device own the same IP address and MAC address, and network 1 and network 2 are used
as hot standby each other. When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is
used to communicate between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the
other healthy network when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal
communication.

Taking a CPU module with four Ethernet ports as an example, each bit is corresponding with
an Ethernet port, i.e., Bit0, Bit1, Bit2 and Bit3 are corresponding with Ethernet port 1, Ethernet

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-5


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 respectively. If a bond between Ethernet port 1 and
Ethernet 2 is created, the setting [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond] is set as “3”. The specific setting is
shown in the following figure.

Ethernet port 1

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
0 0 1 1 0011 3 1 0 0 1 1001 9
Ethernet port 2

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
0 1 0 1 0101 5 0 1 1 0 0110 6
Ethernet port 3

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value

1 0 1 0 1010 10 1 1 0 0 1100 12
Ethernet port 4

CPU Module

Figure 7.1-1 Schematic diagram of port bonding

The switching logic of Active-Standby mode is:

Take the device's Ethernet ports 1 & 2 for example and assume that Port 1 and Port 2 are
bonded, and Port 1 is connected to NET 1 while Port 2 is connected to NET 2.

 After the device is powered on, only Port 1 is activated when both NET 1 and NET 2 are
normal.

 If NET 1 is abnormal, Port 2 will be activated if NET 2 is normal.


7
 If NET1 is abnormal, Port 2 cannot be activated if NET 2 is also abnormal. The device will
keep trying on Port 1.

 If Port 2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if NET 1 has been restored to
normal. It will be switched to Port 1 only if NET 2 is abnormal.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

14. [IP_SyslogServer**] (**=01, 02, 03, 04)

“Syslog” is a communication protocol for message logging, it is used for security auditing in
this device.

This setting is designed to configure the IP address of syslog server **, and the device can
upload audit log to the syslog server. The setting is available only when cyber security is
configured in the device.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

15. [En_IP_Whitelist]

It is designed to enable/disable the whitelist function of this device.

7-6 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

A whitelist is a list of IP addresses that are granted access to a certain system or protocol.

If all IP addresses are forbidden to connect to this device (except those included in the whitelist),
please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If all IP addresses are permitted to be connected to this device, please configure this setting
as “Disabled”.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

16. [IP**_Whitelist] (**=01, 02...16)

It is designed to configure No.** IP address of the whitelist.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

If the setting [En_IP_Whitelist] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings


7.2.1 Access path

Device LCD: MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  IEC61850 Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Comm Settings  IEC61850

Settings

7.2.2 Setting List


7
No. Settings Range Step Unit
1 IEDNAME Max 20 characters - -
2 Pcnt_Deadband 0.00~100.00 0.01 %
3 Threshold_ZeroDrift 0.001~0.500 0.001 -
Disabled
4 En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg - -
Enabled
IEC61850
5 Opt_DualNetMode_MMS - -
GB32890
Disabled
6 En_IEC62351_TCP_Port - -
Enabled
Disabled
7 En_IEC61850_TCP_Port - -
Enabled

7.2.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [IEDNAME]

It is designed to configure the IED name of this device in IEC 61850 protocol.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-7


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

It cannot be an empty string and shall be unique within an SCD file.

It is recommended to configure this setting by SCD configuration in the PCS-Studio


configuration tool, and then download the new CID file to this device, i.e.: it is not
recommended to modify this setting directly, so as to avoid inconsistence between “IEDName”
in the CID file and the “IEDName” in the SCD file.

If this setting is modified, the IED name in the CID file of this device will be changed
simultaneously and vice versa.

All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:

“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”
|“m”|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“
Y”|“y”|“Z”|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9”

This setting must start with an alpha character, and it is case sensitive.

The length of the setting [IEDNAME] should be less than 20 characters.

As shown in the following figure, the length of the setting [IEDNAME] is also limited by the
length of “LDName”:

In IEC 61850 Ed1: the length of “LDName” must be <= 32 characters.

In IEC 61850 Ed2: the length of “LDName” must be <= 64 characters.

LDName

Attribute “Inst”of the


The setting [IEDNAME] element “LDevice” in the
CID file of this device

Figure 7.2-1 LDName

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [Pcnt_Deadband]

Only the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using IEC
61850. It is expressed as a percentage value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set
this setting to a bigger value.

7-8 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

3. [Threshold_ZeroDrift]

For any measurement value which is sent to the communication client (e.g.: local SCADA
system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using IEC 61850, if it is smaller than this setting, it
will be processed as “0”.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively big, please set this
setting to a big value, so as to eliminate influence of zero drift.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively small, please set
this setting to a small value, so as to avoid too many measurement values being processed as
“0” mistakenly.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

4. [En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg]

If IEC 61850 MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) quality change report function is
required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.
7
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

5. [Opt_DualNetMode_MMS]

It is designed to select the MMS network communication mode with the IEC 61850
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via network A and B of this device.

2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.2-1 Setting value options of [Opt_DualNetMode_MMS]

No. Setting value option Description

Network mode with IEC 61850 protocol. In this mode, the instances of Report
Control Block (RCB) cannot be shared, so different clients should use different
1 IEC61850
report instances to send reports. The “IEC61850” mode is preferred in most
overseas projects.

2 GB32890 Network mode with GB32890 standard. In this mode, for different clients meeting

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-9


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description


the redundancy conditions of A and B networks, if one client enables an RCB
instance, the device will only send a report to the enabled client. When the enabled
client is interrupted, another redundant client will cancel and re-enable the RCB
instance, and the device will send a report to the re-enabled redundant client. The
“GB32890” mode is a special mode widely used in China, which needs to be used
with clients supporting.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

6. [En_IEC62351_TCP_Port]

It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for IEC 62351 protocol.

To realize the station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication, please enable this setting
and configure certificate, private key, etc. of this device and corresponding IEC 62351 client.

If station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication is NOT required, please configure this
setting as “Disabled” to close the listening port of IEC 62351 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7. [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port]

It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for IEC 61850 protocol.

If station level IEC 61850 communication is NOT required, please configure this setting as
7 “Disabled” to close the MMS listening port of IEC 61850 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.3 DNP Communication Settings


7.3.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  DNP Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Comm Settings  DNP Settings

7.3.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Disabled
1 En_TCP1_DNP - -
Enabled
2 Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1 -
3 Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP 0~65519 1 -
4 IP_Master_TCP1_DNP 0.0.0.0~ - -

7-10 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


255.255.255.255

5 Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP 0~4 1 -
6 t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP 1~5 1 s
7 t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP 0~7200 1 s
Disabled
8 En_UR_TCP1_DNP - -
Enabled
Disabled
9 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP1_DNP - -
Enabled
10 Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP 2~10 1 -
11 t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP 1~5000 1 s
12 Class_BI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1 -
13 Class_AI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 1 -
14 t_Select_TCP1_DNP 0~240 1 s
15 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP 0~3600 1 s
1-BISingleBit
16 Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP - -
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
17 Obj02DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
18 Obj30DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
7
19 Obj32DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
20 Obj40DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
Disabled
21 En_TCP2_DNP - -
Enabled
22 Addr_Slave_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 1 -
23 Addr_Master_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 1 -
0.0.0.0~
24 IP_Master_TCP2_DNP - -
255.255.255.255
25 Opt_Map_TCP2_DNP 0~4 1 -
26 t_AppLayer_TCP2_DNP 1~5 1 s
27 t_KeepAlive_TCP2_DNP 0~7200 1 s
Disabled
28 En_UR_TCP2_DNP - -
Enabled

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-11


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Disabled
29 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP2_DNP - -
Enabled
30 Num_URRetry_TCP2_DNP 2~10 1 -
31 t_UROfflRetry_TCP2_DNP 1~5000 1 s
32 Class_BI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 1 -
33 Class_AI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 1 -
34 t_Select_TCP2_DNP 0~240 1 s
35 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP2_DNP 0~3600 1 s
1-BISingleBit
36 Obj01DefltVar_TCP2_DNP - -
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
37 Obj02DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
38 Obj30DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
39 Obj32DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
40 Obj40DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
7 41 En_TCP3_DNP
Disabled
- -
Enabled
42 Addr_Slave_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 1 -
43 Addr_Master_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 1 -
0.0.0.0~
44 IP_Master_TCP3_DNP - -
255.255.255.255
45 Opt_Map_TCP3_DNP 0~4 1 -
46 t_AppLayer_TCP3_DNP 1~5 1 s
47 t_KeepAlive_TCP3_DNP 0~7200 1 s
Disabled
48 En_UR_TCP3_DNP - -
Enabled
Disabled
49 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP3_DNP - -
Enabled
50 Num_URRetry_TCP3_DNP 2~10 1 -
51 t_UROfflRetry_TCP3_DNP 1~5000 1 s
52 Class_BI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 1 -
53 Class_AI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 1 -

7-12 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


54 t_Select_TCP3_DNP 0~240 1 s
55 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP3_DNP 0~3600 1 s
1-BISingleBit
56 Obj01DefltVar_TCP3_DNP - -
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
57 Obj02DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
58 Obj30DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
59 Obj32DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
60 Obj40DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
Disabled
61 En_TCP4_DNP - -
Enabled
62 Addr_Slave_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 1 -
63 Addr_Master_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 1 -
0.0.0.0~
64 IP_Master_TCP4_DNP - -
255.255.255.255
65 Opt_Map_TCP4_DNP 0~4 1 - 7
66 t_AppLayer_TCP4_DNP 1~5 1 s
67 t_KeepAlive_TCP4_DNP 0~7200 1 s
Disabled
68 En_UR_TCP4_DNP - -
Enabled
Disabled
69 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP4_DNP - -
Enabled
70 Num_URRetry_TCP4_DNP 2~10 1 -
71 t_UROfflRetry_TCP4_DNP 1~5000 1 s
72 Class_BI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 1 -
73 Class_AI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 1 -
74 t_Select_TCP4_DNP 0~240 1 s
75 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP4_DNP 0~3600 1 s
1-BISingleBit
76 Obj01DefltVar_TCP4_DNP - -
2-BIWithStatus
1-BIChWoutT
77 Obj02DefltVar_TCP4_DNP - -
2-BIChWithAbsTime

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-13


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Step Unit


3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
78 Obj30DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
79 Obj32DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
80 Obj40DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt

7.3.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [En_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to enable/disable the No.* TCP port for DNP protocol.

If network DNP communication is NOT required, please configure this setting as “Disabled” to
close the network DNP protocol listening port.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the DNP address of the slave (i.e.: this device) of No.* network DNP
session.
7 Value of this setting should be consistent with corresponding setting value of the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, master station in control center, etc.) of No.*
network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

3. [Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the DNP address of the master (i.e.: the communication client) of
No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

4. [IP_Master_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the IP address of the master (i.e.: the communication client) of No.*

7-14 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

network DNP session.

This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

5. [Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the DNP communication point map of No.* network DNP session.

5 setting value options (“0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”) are available, each of them corresponds to a
communication point map pre-configured by the PCS-Studio configuration tool.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

6. [t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the timeout duration of the application layer of No.* network DNP
session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

7. [t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
7
It is designed to configure the heartbeat time interval of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

8. [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

If the communication client of No.* network DNP session requires this device to support
sending UR (Unsolicited Response) messages, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

9. [En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

If this setting is configured as “Disabled”, this device will send Class 1, 2, 3 events

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-15


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

spontaneously to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this setting is configured as “Enabled”, the communication client must activate UR reporting
by enabling unsolicited application function (Function code: 20). After activation, No.* network
DNP session of this device begins to send Class 1, 2, 3 events to the master station
spontaneously.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting


will be unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

10. [Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the online retransmission number for sending the UR messages to
the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting


will be unnecessary to be configured.

11. [t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the offline retransmission interval for sending the UR messages to
the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting


7 will be unnecessary to be configured.

12. [Class_BI_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.

4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-1 Setting value options of [Class_BI_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate
1 0
any event to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class
2 1
1 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

3 2 If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class

7-16 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description


2 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate class
4 3
3 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

13. [Class_AI_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default event class generated by the analog input points to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.

4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-2 Setting value options of [Class_AI_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will NOT generate
1 0
any event to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate class
2 1
1 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

3 2
If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate class 7
2 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate class
4 3
3 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

14. [t_Select_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the selection timeout duration of the remote control and the remote
regulation of No.* network DNP session

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-17


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

be configured.

15. [t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to configure the time interval of the time synchronization function of No.* network
DNP session

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

16. [Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default variation for object group 1 (“Obj01”) of No.* network DNP
session.

2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-3 Setting value options of [Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

Binary Input (Single Bit)– packet format

1 1-BISingleBit If this option is selected, “Object group 1, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the current value of a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain a single-bit
binary input state without status flags.

Binary Input – With Status flags

7 2 2-BIWithStatus If this option is selected, “Object group 1, variation 2” will be adopted to report
the current value of a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain a status octet
that includes the state of the binary input.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

17. [Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default variation for object group 2 (“Obj02”) of No.* network DNP
session.

3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-4 Setting value options of [Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP]

7-18 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description

Binary Input status Change event – Without Time

1 1-BIChWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 1” will be adopted to report
events related to a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags.

Binary Input status Change event – With Absolute Time

If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 2” will be adopted to report


2 2-BIChWithAbsTime events related to a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags, and the absolute time when the
event occurred.

Binary Input status Change event – With Relative Time

If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 3” will be adopted to report

3 3-BIChWithRelTime events related to a binary input point. Variation 3 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags, and the relative time when the
event occurred. A preceding common time-of-occurrence (CTO) object, group 51,
establishes the basis of the relative time.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

18. [Obj30DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4) 7


It is designed to select the default variation for object group 30 (“Obj30”) of No.* network DNP
session.

5 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-5 Setting value options of [Obj30DefltVar_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer with flag

1 1-AI32Int If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet
and a 32-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 16-bit Integer with flag


2 2-AI16Int
If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 2” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-19


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description


and a 16-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer Without Flag

3 3-AI32IntWoutF If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 3” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 3 objects contain a 32-bit,
signed integer value.

Analog Input – 16-bit Integer Without Flag

4 4-AI16IntWoutF If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 4” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 4 objects contain a 16-bit,
signed integer value.

Analog Input – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

5 5-AI32Flt If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 5” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet
and a 32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

19. [Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)


7 It is designed to select the default variation for object group 32 (“Obj32”) of No.* network DNP
session.

3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-6 Setting value options of [Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer Event Without Time

1 1-AI32IntEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 1” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and
a 32-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 16-bit Integer Event Without Time

2 2-AI16IntEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 2” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and
a 16-bit, signed integer value.

7-20 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description

Analog Input – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point Event Without Time

3 5-AI32FltEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 5” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and
a 32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

20. [Obj40DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default variation for object group 40 (“Obj40”) of No.* network DNP
session.

3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.3-7 Setting value options of [Obj40DefltVar_TCP*_DNP]

No. Setting value option Description

Analog Output status – 32-bit Integer with flag

1 1-AO32Int If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a
32-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Output status – 16-bit Integer with flag


7
2 2-AO16Int If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 2” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a
16-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Output status – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

3 3-AO32Flt If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 3” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 3 objects contain a flag octet and a
32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication
client of No.* network DNP session.

If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to


be configured.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-21


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

7.4 IEC103 Communication Settings


7.4.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  IEC103 Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Comm Settings  IEC103
Settings

7.4.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


Current_Language
1 Opt_Caption_103 Fixed_Chinese - -
Fixed_English
Disabled
2 En_Broadcast_LAN1 - -
Enabled
Disabled
3 En_Broadcast_LAN2 - -
Enabled
Disabled
4 En_Broadcast_LAN3 - -
Enabled
Disabled
5 En_Broadcast_LAN4 - -
Enabled
DisturbData
6 Format_Wave_Sent - -
File
7 Pcnt_Deadband_Net 0.00~100.00 0.01 %
8 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535 1 s

7 9 En_103_TCP&UDP_Port
Disabled
Enabled
- -

7.4.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [Opt_Caption_103]

The standard application of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol adopts a twisted pair EIA-485
connection over a distance up to 500m. This device also supports the NR network 103 protocol
that is an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103 and is applicable through Ethernet network.

The setting [Opt_Caption_103] is designed to select the language of group caption of IEC
60870-5-103 protocol and NR network 103 protocol.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [En_Broadcast_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

This setting is only used for NR network 103 protocol.

Only when NR network 103 protocol is used for the No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module, this
setting must be set as “Enabled”. Now this device will send UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
messages through the No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.

7-22 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

3. [Format_Wave_Sent]

It is designed to configure the data format for sending waveform list by using NR network 103
protocol.

2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.4-1 Setting value options of [Format_Wave_Sent]

No. Setting value option Description

1 DisturbData Send the waveform list in ASDU23 mode

2 File Send the waveform list in ASDU222 mode

If both ASDU23 mode and ASDU222 mode are supported onsite, it is recommended to
configure this setting as “File”, because the waveform list can be transmitted faster.

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

4. [Pcnt_Deadband_Net]

Only the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using NR
network 103 protocol. It is expressed as a percentage value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set 7
this setting to a bigger value.

If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.

If the measurement value change is not required to be sent to the communication client, please
configure this setting as “0”.

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

5. [Period_Measmt_Net]

It is designed to configure the time period for sending the measurement value to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using
NR network 103 protocol.

If this device is not required send all measurement values to the communication client
spontaneously based on the integrity period, please configure this setting as “0”.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-23


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be


unnecessary to be configured.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

6. [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port]

It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port & UDP port for NR network 103 protocol.

If NR network 103 communication is not required, please configure this setting as “Disabled”
to close the network NR network 103 protocol listening port.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

Please refer to the following table for the relevant settings of NR network
103 protocol and IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

Table 7.4-2 Relevant settings of 103 protocol

Communication
No. Protocol name Relevant settings
mode

All the settings in the submenu


NR network 103
1 Network mode “MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm
protocol
SettingsIEC103 Settings” in device LCD.

The setting [Opt_Caption_103] in the submenu


“MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings 
7 Comm Settings IEC103 Settings” in device LCD.

The following settings in the submenu “MainMenu


IEC 60870-5-103 Serial connection  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings
2
protocol mode  General Comm Settings” in device LCD:

[Protocol_RS485-1], [Protocol_RS485-2],

[Baud_RS485-1], [Baud_RS485-2],

[Addr_RS485-1], [Addr_RS485-2].

7.5 Modbus Communication Settings


7.5.1 Access path:

MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  Modbus Settings

7-24 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

7.5.2 Setting List

No. Settings Range Step Unit


1 En_Modbus_TCP_Port Disabled, Enabled - -

7.5.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [En_Modbus_TCP_Port]

It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for Modbus protocol.

If network Modbus communication is NOT required, please configure this setting as “Disabled”
to close the network Modbus protocol listening port.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.6 SV Communication Settings


7.6.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings  SV Settings

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Comm Settings  SV Settings

7.6.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 SampleRate_SV 0~65535 1 -
2 t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV 1500~15000 1 μs
3 t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV 600~1500 1 μs
NetMode 7
4 Opt_RecvMode_SV P2P - -
Resv

7.6.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [SampleRate_SV]

It is designed to configure the sampling rate of the received SV data from the merging units.

Value of this setting must be the same as the sampling rate of the transmitted SV data of the
merging units.

2. [t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV]

It is designed to configure the backward time delay of SV interpolation for networking mode.
This backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV
interpolation.

Base on engineering experience, value of this setting is recommended to be kept as the default
value “2000μs”. Please consult our engineer if modification is required.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 7-25


Date: February 5, 2021
7 Communication Settings

3. [t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV]

It is designed to configure the backward time delay of SV interpolation for peer-to-peer (P2P)
mode. This backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by
the SV interpolation.

Base on engineering experience, value of this setting is recommended to be kept as the default
value “850μs”. Please consult our engineer if modification is required.

4. [Opt_RecvMode_SV]

It is designed to select the SV receiving mode.

3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

Table 7.6-1 Setting value options of [Opt_RecvMode_SV]

No. Setting value option Description


Networking mode will be adopted.
If there is communication equipment (e.g.: Ethernet switch, etc.) in the SV
3 NetMode
communication link, please select “NetMode”.
If “NetMode” is selected, all the devices must share the same clock source.
Peer-to-peer (P2P) mode will be adopted.
4 P2P If there is no communication equipment in the SV communication link, please
select “P2P”.

5 Resv Reserved

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7
If there is no “SV_Settings” submenu in the PCS-Studio configuration tool,
please access the path “Project NodeIED NodeDevice SetupGlobal
ConfigMOT” as shown in the following figure, configure the “Sampling
Mode” (S4) to “Non-conventional instrument transformer”. Save and
close this project, and then open this project again to enable the
“SV_Settings” submenu to be visible.

Figure 7.6-1 Visualize the “SV_Settings” submenu

7-26 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

8 Logic Links

Table of Contents

8.1 Function Links ................................................................................................. 8-1


8.1.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................8-1

8.1.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................8-1

8.1.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................8-1

8.2 GOOSE Sending Links .................................................................................... 8-1


8.2.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................8-1

8.2.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................8-1

8.2.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................8-2

8.3 GOOSE Receiving Links ................................................................................. 8-3


8.3.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................8-3

8.3.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................8-3

8.3.3 Setting Guidelines ..............................................................................................................8-3

8.4 SV Receiving Links.......................................................................................... 8-4


8.4.1 Access path ........................................................................................................................8-4

8.4.2 Setting List ..........................................................................................................................8-4

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 8-a


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

8-b PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

In the chapter, the prefix ”x.” in some signals, settings and measurements,
represents some side or bushing of transformer defined by user through
PCS-Studio software, which may be “HVS”, “MVS”, “LVS”, “HVS2”, “MVS2”,
“LVS2”, “CWS”, “HVB”, “MVB”, “LVB”, etc. If only one protection element is
equipped, the prefix “x.” may disappear.

8.1 Function Links


8.1.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Logic Links  Function Links

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Logic Links  Function Links

8.1.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit


1 Link_** Disabled, Enabled - -

8.1.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [Link_**] (**=01, 02...08)

It is designed to provide function link ** for logic programming via PCS-Studio configuration
tool: if it is configured as “Enabled”, it can be used as “1” to enable a functional element, if it
is configured as “Disabled”, it can be used as “0” to disable a functional element.

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA
system, master station in control center, etc.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

8.2 GOOSE Sending Links 8


8.2.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Logic Links  GOOSE Send Links

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Logic Links  GOOSE Send
Links

8.2.2 Setting List


No. Name Range Step Unit
Disabled
1 @B**.Name_***_GCommLink@.GLink_Send - -
Enabled

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 8-1


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

@B**.Name_***_GCommLink@ is the set value of the corresponding label

setting (see Section 2.4).

8.2.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [@B**.Name_***_GCommLink@.GLink_Send]

It is designed to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE send logic link.

An example to configure “@B**.Name_***_GCommLink@” to “111” is introduced as shown in


the following figure:

Figure 8.2-1 Configure GOOSE send logic link name

In the PCS-Studio configuration tool, access the path “Project NodeIED NodeProgram
Bxx.Process_ConfigB**.UserPage_Goose”, select a GOOSE send logic link symbol from
the right side through the path:

PropertyLibrariesUSER_GOOSE_SMVGoose_outGS_LOGIC_LINK:S
8 Drag this symbol to the configuration page, double-click this symbol to pop up a dialog, access
the “Basic Information” page, modify the “Value” column of the row “English Description”
to “111”.

Save and close this project, and then open this project again. Now the GOOSE send logic link
name [@B**.Name_***_GCommLink@.GLink_Send] will change to “111.GLink_Send”
automatically.

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, all the sent GOOSE data will be cleared to
0.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

8-2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

8.3 GOOSE Receiving Links


8.3.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Logic Links  GOOSE Recv Links

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Logic Links  GOOSE Recv
Links

8.3.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 @B**.Name_***_GCommLink@.GLink_Recv Disabled, Enabled - -

2 GLink_RecvSim Disabled, Enabled - -

8.3.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [@B**.Name_**_GCommLink@.GLink_Recv] (**=00, 01, 02...)

It is designed to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE receive logic link.

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, the alarm signals “GAlm_ADisc”,
“GAlm_BDisc”, “GAlm_Maint_Unmatched” of this GOOSE communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

If there is no “GOOSE_Send_Links” or “GOOSE_Recv_Links” submenu


in the PCS-Studio configuration tool, please access the path “Project
NodeIED NodeGlobal ConfigSystem Config” as shown in the
8
following figure, access “System configurationGOOSE (Slot 01)” in the
configuration page, configure the “Option” value to “Enabled”. Save and
close this project, and then open this project again to enable the
“GOOSE_Send_Links” and the “GOOSE_Recv_Links” submenus to be
visible.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 8-3


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

Figure 8.3-1 Visualize the “GOOSE_Send_Links” and “GOOSE_Recv_Links” submenu

2. [GLink_RecvSim]

It is designed to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated GOOSE messages.

If this device is required to accept simulated GOOSE messages, please configure this setting
as “Enabled”.

If this device is required to accept real GOOSE messages, please configure this setting as
“Disabled”.

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA
system, master station in control center, etc.

8.4 SV Receiving Links


8.4.1 Access path

Device LCD: Main Menu  Settings  Logic Links  SV Recv Links

PCS-Studio: Project Node  IED Node  Setting  Global  Logic Links  SV Recv Links

8 8.4.2 Setting List

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 @B**.Name_***_SVCommLink@.SVLink_Recv Disabled, Enabled - -

2 SVLink_RecvSim Disabled, Enabled - -

@B**.Name_***_SVCommLink@ is the set value of the corresponding label

setting (Section 2.4).

8.4.3 Setting Guidelines

1. [@Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink@.SVLink_Recv] (**=00, 01, 02...)

8-4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
8 Logic Links

It is designed to enable/disable corresponding SV receive logic link.

This link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA system,
master station in control center, etc.

If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, the alarm signals “SVAlm_ADisc”,
“SVAlm_BDisc”, “SVAlm_Maint_Unmatched” of this SV communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

If there is no “SV_Recv_Links” submenu in the PCS-Studio configuration


tool, please access the path “Project NodeIED NodeDevice
SetupGlobal ConfigMOT” as shown in the following figure, configure
the “Sampling Mode” (S4) to “Non-conventional instrument
transformer”. Save and close this project, and then open this project again
to enable the “SV_Recv_Links” submenu to be visible.

Figure 8.4-1 Visualize the “SV_Recv_Links” submenu

2. [SVLink_RecvSim] 8
It is designed to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated SV messages.

If this device is required to accept simulated SV messages, please configure this setting as
“Enabled”.

If this device is required to accept real SV messages, please configure this setting as
“Disabled”.

This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA
system, master station in control center, etc.

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 8-5


Date: February 5, 2021
Appendix A Glossary

Appendix A Glossary

A C

"a" Contact is breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when
Standard Device Number 52A) that closes sending binary signals between IEDs
when the breaker is closed and opens when
CB Circuit breaker
the breaker is open.
CID Configured IED Description
AC Alternating current
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
Transient Data Exchange format for
AI Analog input Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
ANSI American National Standards Institute
CPU Central Processing Unit
AR Autoreclosing
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
ASDU Application Service Data Unit–An ASDU
can consist of one or more identical information CT Current Transformer
objects. A sequence of the same information
CTS Current Circuit Supervision
elements, for example measured values, is
identified by the address of the information
D
object. The address of the information object
defines the associated address of the first
DBDL Dead Bus Dead Line
information element of the sequence. A
consecutive number identifies the subsequent DBLL Dead Bus Live Line
information elements. The number builds on
DC Direct Current
this address in integral increments (+1).
DLLB Dead Line Live Bus
B
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE
Std 1815-2012
"b" Contact is breaker auxiliary contact (ANSI
Standard Device Number 52B) that closes DPFC Deviation of Power Frequency
when the breaker is open and opens when the Component–In case of a fault occurred in the
breaker is closed. power system, the fault component could be
analyzed into three parts: the power frequency
BFP Breaker failure protection
components before the fault, the power
BI Binary Input frequency variables during the fault and the
transient variables during the fault. DPFC is the
BO Binary Output
power frequency variable during the fault.
BIM Binary Input Module
DSP Digital Signal Processor A
BOM Binary Output Module
DTT Direct Transfer Trip Scheme
PCS-978S Transformer Relay 1

Date: February 5, 2021


Appendix A Glossary

E LED Light-emitting Diode

EHV Extra High Voltage M


EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker

F MMS Manufacturing Message Specification

MOV Metal-oxide Varistor


FL Fault Location

FR Fault Recorder O

G OLTC On-load Tap Changer

OOS Out-of-Step
G.703 Electrical and functional description for
digital lines used by local telephone companies.
P
Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
PD Pole Discrepancy
GIS Gas-insulated Switchgear
PDTT Permissive Direct Transfer Trip
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation
PL Programmable Logic
Event
POTT Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip
GPS Global Positioning System
PPM Pulse Per Minute
H
PPS Pulse Per Second

HMI Human-machine Interface PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol

HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy PUTT Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip

HV High-voltage
R
HVDC High-voltage Direct Current
RMS Root Mean Square
I
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

ICD IED Capability Description RTD Resistance Temperature Detector

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission RTU Remote Terminal Unit

IED Intelligent Electronic Device


S
IRIG-B InterRange Instrumentation Group
Time code format B SA Substation Automation

SCADA Supervision, Control And Data


A L
Acquisition

LCD Liquid Crystal Display SCD Substation Configuration Description

2 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021
Appendix A Glossary

SCL Substation Configuration Description STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol


Language
T
SLD Single-line Diagram

SIR Source-to-line Impedance Ratio TCS Trip Circuit Supervision

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol– TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol over
An Internet standard protocol and serves for Internet Protocol
the administration of nodes in an IP network.
U
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol–A
protocol for the synchronization of clocks via
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
the Internet. With SNTP, client computers can
synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a
W
time server.

SOE Sequence of Events–An ordered, time- WI Weak end infeed


stamped log of status changes at binary inputs
(also referred to as state inputs). SOE is used V
to restore or analyze the performance, or an
electrical power system itself, over a certain VT Voltage transformer
period of time.
VTS Voltage Circuit Supervision
SOTF Switch-Onto-Fault

A list of function numbers used to represent electrical protection and control element. The device
function numbers used in this manual include the following:

21 Distance element element

24 Overexcitation element 52 AC circuit breaker

25 Synchronism-check element 59 Overvoltage element

27 Undervoltage element 64 Restricted earth fault element

32 Power element 67 Directional overcurrent element

37 Undercurrent element 68 Power swing blocking element

46 Phase-balance current element 78 Out-of-step element

49 Thermal overload element 79 Reclosing element

50 Instantaneous overcurrent element 81 Frequency element

51 Definite-time or inverse-time overcurrent 87 Differential element

These numbers are frequently used within a suffix letter to further designate their application. The
suffix letters used in this instruction manual include the following: A
P Phase element G Residual/Ground element

PCS-978S Transformer Relay 3

Date: February 5, 2021


Appendix A Glossary

N Neutral/Ground element

Q Negative-sequence element

4 PCS-978S Transformer Relay


Date: February 5, 2021

You might also like